Chaos & Cyberculture, by Timothy Leary, Ph.D.

That's French for "the ancient system," as in the ancient system of feudal privileges and the exercise of autocratic power over the peasants. The ancien regime never goes away, like vampires and dinosaur bones they are always hidden in the earth, exercising a mysterious influence. It is not paranoia to believe that the elites scheme against the common man. Inform yourself about their schemes here.

Re: Chaos & Cyberculture, by Timothy Leary, Ph.D.

Postby admin » Thu Jun 13, 2019 3:57 am

Part 1 of 4

Image

III. COUNTERCULTURES
1. The Woodstock Generation
2. From Yippies to Yuppies
3. The Cyberpunk: The Individual as Reality Pilot
4. The New Breed
5. Electronic Cultures
6. The Next Twenty Years
7. The Godparent: Conversation with Winona Ryder


Image

III.1. The Woodstock Generation

It was twenty years ago this summer that more than four hundred thousand young Americans spent three days and nights carousing spectacularly at the Woodstock rock festival. It was simply the biggest and wildest and most influential party in all of history! If not, please prove me wrong, so that we can learn how to improve.

It was twenty years ago today...


For one weekend this farm field became the third largest city in New York state. Almost half a million spoiled, affluent, educated young Americans crowded, jammed, squashed into a small cow pasture in upstate New York.

There was minimum sanitation. Minimum food (which was, of course, lovingly shared). Wall-to-wall mud. That's the down side.

On the up side these concert-goers experienced the greatest pagan, Dionysian rock 'n' roll musical event ever performed, with plenty of joyous nudity, and wall-to-wall psychedelic sacraments.

And click on this: not one act of recorded violence!

The Woodstock festival was an all-star revival of the oldest and most basic religious ritual: a pagan celebration of life and raw nature, a classic group “possession ceremony” in which worshippers “go out of their minds” to recklessly confront the chaotic Higher Sources, protected by the power of group support.

Check the anthropology texts. Read Campbell, read Frazer, and you’ll see that these rituals date way back before the upstart, aggressive, pushy, puritanical monotheistic (One Male God) religions. Pagan rites always celebrate the same natural, instinctive, guileless, eternal utopian values: Peace. Pure ecstatic sexuality. Equality in the eyes of the Higher Powers. Joy. Endemic rapture. Mirth. Tolerance. Affirmation of life, of the human spirit The honest naked human body. Irreverence. And merry laughter.

Such festivals reawaken the oldest and most utopian aspirations of the human brain.

However, be warned. If you stand up as an individual and declaim these goals, you are sure to be derided by the Rambo-Liddy-Ollie North steroid gang (and probably by most of the important adult authorities in your sector) as a hopeless, naive idealist “The world is a tough, mean neighborhood,” you will be told by the conventional-wisdom experts.

But when four hundred thousand energetic, educated young people assembled, in August 1969, to proclaim these venerable pagan values in action, the effect was contagious. A fearless confidence flared up in young adults. You’ve seen the films of the 1960s. Sunny, impertinent smiles were infectious. A sense of undeniable togetherness. No secrecy. No shame for experiencing pagan moments. Psychedelic herbs proudly and openly exchanged. Can you imagine anyone sneaking off at Woodstock to shoot heroin behind a bush? Or surreptitiously tooting cocaine? Or sneakily dropping steroids—while listening to Jimi Hendrix and the Grateful Dead?

This “Woodstock experience” became the role model for the counterculture of that time. The Summer of Love kids went on to permanently change American culture with principles that the Soviets in 1989 called glasnost and perestroika.

Image

The War on Drugs made mellow marijuana prohibitively expensive. The DEA made sure that the peaceable, visionary elixirs like ’shrooms, mescaline. LSD, and MDMA became inaccessible. So good-bye to turn on, tune in, drop out... and hello to the motto of the 1980s: Hang on. Hang in. Hang over.


Hippies started the ecology movement They combated racism. They liberated sexual stereotypes, encouraged change, individual pride, and self-confidence. They questioned robot materialism. In four years they managed to stop the Vietnam War. They got marijuana decriminalized in fourteen states during the Carter administration. Etc.

There was another by-product of the ’sixties generation so obvious that it is rarely considered. When more than four hundred thousand virile, nubile, horny young men and women assembled in the atmosphere of life affirmation there was, inevitably “a whole lotta shaking goin’ on.” It’s possible that ten thousand babies were conceived that magical weekend in 1969.

Where are these “kids of the ’sixties kids” today? And who are they?

The babes of the Woodstock season are now, in 1989, twenty years old. In the next twelve years their younger cohort members will be swamping the college campuses.

Will these college kids of the 1990s, the grandchildren of Dr. Spock, be different from the conservative college kids of the 1980s?

If your Mom was running around bare-ass at Woodstock... if your Dad helped Abbie Hoffman levitate the Pentagon and helped end the Vietnam War... if your parents smoked dope during their formative years while listening to Dylan, the Rolling Stones, and the Beatles... if they wept at the fascist-assassination deaths of the Kennedys, Martin Luther King, Jr., and John Lennon... if your folks turned on, tuned in, dropped out... are you going to major in Business Administration and stampede to Wall Street to sell illegal junk bonds?

The poor, conservative, fearful, conforming college students of the Reagan years w ere stuck with Moms and Dads who grew up in the bland Eisenhower 1950s. The ghosts of that decade—Senator (Red-Scare) McCarthy and General Douglas (“nuke the slant-eyes”) MacArthur and John Wayne and Father Knows Best came back to haunt the colleges in the 1980s.

THE REAGAN GENERATION

Image

The Woodstock revolution started in 1966, peaked in in 1976, and hit the wall with a thud! in 1980 with the election of Nancy Reagan.

During the 1980s the gentle tolerance of Woodstock was replaced by a hard-line Marine Corps attitude. The pacifism of “Give Peace a Chance” gave way to a swaggering militarism. The conquest of Grenada. The glorious bombing of Qaddafi’s tent. The covert war against Nicaragua. Star Trek gave way to Star Wars.

The War on Drugs made mellow marijuana prohibitively expensive. The DEA made sure that the peaceable, visionary elixirs like ’shrooms, mescaline, LSD, and MDMA became inaccessible. So good-bye to turn on, tune in, drop out... and hello to the motto of the 1980s: Hang on. Hang in. Hang over.

And what did the War on Drugs produce? A booze epidemic. Alcohol—the drug of choice of the NRA, the Bubba hunting crowd, the American Legion—is back in the saddle.

Turn down! Tune out!
Throw up!

And cocaine. An epidemic of toot, snort, snow, blow, base, crack has the inner cities wired and fired. Cocaine, the drug that fueled Hiller’s SS and the Nazi Blitzkrieg suddenly is turning the inner cities of Reagan-Bush America into battlegrounds! Guns, rifles, automatic weapons conveniently supplied by the NRA and your government-licensed gun dealer. Just walk up and name your weapon, Bucko. No questions asked.

Thru out! Shoot up!
Drop dead!

And here’s a pharmaceutical plus for the post-Woodstock America: what unique new Rambo drug did the stand-tall, muscle-bound Reagan-Bush regime give our youth to replace the wimpy Carter years?

Steroids!
Turn off! Tune out!
Pump up!
(Thanks a lot, Nancy.)

What about the college kids? Remember, the ’sixties counterculture was centered on the campus¬ es. Berkeley. Rent State. Columbia. Madison. Austin. Boulder. Seattle. In the 1980s, however, the colleges, the source of our future, have “seethed with rest” While brave students in South Korea, China, the Soviet Union were exhibiting the idealism they dutifully learned from Woodstock, back in America students have become conservative, materialistic, career-oriented, like the Japanese universities, and like the Russian colleges under Brezhnev.

In the last ten years there has been little campus concern for social issues. The Dan Quayle fraternity-sorority system flourished again. The ultimate college clowns, ROTC students, grown men and women dressed like Boy Scouts sporting Ollie North crewcuts, became, if not popular, at least acceptable.

The audible symbol of this change from the 1960s to the 1980s is the music. If you want to find the soul of a culture, listen to the lyrics that direct the sounds, the beats, the rhythms.

In the 1960s Dylan sang: “We ain’t gonna work on Maggie’s farm no more.” Lennon sang: “Give Peace a Chance.” In the somnambulant 1980s Michael Jackson, Prince, Madonna, George Michael kept us moving in the big auditorium-arenas under the watchful eyes of the security guards, but the lyrics are not high in socially redeeming value, while the anger of young activist musicians is limited to the denigrated punk-club scene.

Conservative politicians and fundamentalist preachers were delighted by the new conformity. College professors who were proud veterans of the ’sixties counterculture vainly expected the new students to carry on the individual-freedom tradition. The more thoughtful students sensed that they were somehow missing something. The sad nostalgia of tie-dye T-shirts couldn’t revive the spirit.

THE SUMMER OF LOVE

How did the Summer of Love turn into the Winter of Irangate and drive-by shootings?

How long will this conservatism last? Will the 1960s renew? The answer is easily found in the demographics.

These conformist kids who were 20 years old in 1980 were raised by parents whose teenage social ideals emerged in the button-down 1950s. The replay is uncannily precise.

Back then we had a lovable old doddering president named Ike whose political tactics were a reassuring grin. There was a big Evil Empire Crusade that led to the pointless slaughter of the Korean War. And if your parents could tolerate Tricky Dick Nixon as vice president in 1959, then you are more able to swallow Dan Quayle as our second-in-command in 1989!

Image

In the 1950s, the domestic cancer—the number-one peril that was threatening our nation from within—was subversive communism. Welcome to a thrilling Civil War that unleashed FBI agents and hard-line police goons to crack down and harass pinkos, communist sympathizers, traitorous peaceniks, and liberals who supported un-American plots to bring about racial and sexual equality.

The 1980s have given us a sequel to McCarthyism. The Civil War on Drugs has unleashed federal agents and hard-line police goons (led, believe it or not, by a “czar”) to harass libertarians, intelligent hedonists, and thirty million marijuana fans who don’t want the government telling them what to do with their minds.

The 1980s have given us a sequel to McCarthyism. The Civil War on Drugs has unleashed federal agents and hardline police goons (led, believe it or not, by a "czar") to harass libertarians, intelligent hedonists, and thirty million marijuana fans who don't want the government telling them what to do with their minds.


The ’eighties witchhunt involves, not loyalty tests by the FBI, but mandatory urine tests by the DEA. The same inquisitional fanaticism is at work.

Careerism and unquestioning acceptance of authority were valued in the 1980s as then, in the 1950s. There was not a whimper in the 1950s when millions of youth were drafted and sent six thousand miles away to invade Korea. The most visible rowdy culture hero, Elvis Presley, reported dutifully to his local draft board, dressed up like a cute soldier boy, saluted smartly for the cameras, and coached by his father figure, Colonel Parker, proclaimed, “I’m looking forward to serving in the Army. 1 think it will be a great experience for me.” (Sometime after his military service in Germany, Elvis wobbled into the office of J. Edgar Hoover while loaded on prescription drugs and volunteered to be a drug informant for the FBI. He boasted that his contacts with musicians would make him an ideal double agent. No John Lennon he.)

For an ’eighties college student whose parents’ wildest moments of cultural individuality and social passion involved panty raids and fraternity-house telephone-booth pranks, is it surprising for them to appear apathetically cheerful in the Reagan-Bush period? Right-wingers and fundamentalists have exulted in the apathy and conformity of ’eighties campuses. “America,” they exult, “has come to its senses. Father knows best!”

The ideals of the 1960s—of individuality, personal freedom, kick-out free expression—were written off as adolescent delinquency. American kids, thank God, have assumed the sober responsibilities of history—to wage the Cold War, to go to church and vole Republican (or Democratic, since it doesn’t really matter), to dress and behave with decorum, to support the military and police who defend us against our deadly foes abroad and the enemies in our urban slums and ghettos.

Image
RICK GRIFFIN

By 1989, however, this right-wing fantasy was beginning to erode in the light of the new explosions of youthful idealism.

Twenty years after Woodstock, the national news once again is featuring hundreds of thousands of young people behind the Iron Curtain, their faces glowing with patriotic idealism, peaceably demonstrating to overthrow an aging federal bureaucracy. It’s powerful deja vu to witness long-haired German kids wearing headbands, flashing the universal peace sign, and putting their bodies and careers on the line for democracy and individual rights. Once again the confrontations with students peacefully defying the National Guard. Once again the daring yet playful tactics of television agit-prop theatre substituted for violence. Thousands of protesters riding bicycles (!) to the revolution! What would Karl Marx make of that maneuver?

Where did those Chinese students learn these clever methods of grabbing the news screens to express their ideals? Where did they learn the techniques of media savvy to counter the armed forces of the state? From the newsreel films of the American campus protests of the late 1960s, whose ideals are not dead. They were more powerful than ever in China’s Tien An Men Square, as well as in the USSR, where glasnost and perestroika define freedom for the individual.

The youth in China, Russia, Czechoslovakia, South Korea are the kids of the ’sixties kids. Keep your eyes open, and you’ll see a revival of this freedom movement coming soon to a college campus near you.

III.2. From Yippies to Yuppies

Since my deportation from Harvard University many years ago, I have been, among other things, a freelance college professor paid by students for one-night-stand lectures about topics too hot for salaried professors.

Back in the 1960s when I flew in for a lecture, the student committee showed up at the airport wearing long hair, sandals, blue jeans, and cheerful, impudent grins. The radio would be blasting out Mick Jagger and Jimi Hendrix as we drove to the campus. The students eagerly asked me about "high” technologies—methods of consciousness expansion, new brands of wonder drugs, new forms of dissident protest, up-to-date developments in the ever-changing metaphysical philosophies of rock stars: Yoko Ono’s theory of astrology; Peter Townsend’s devotion to Baba Ram Dass. I kept abreast of these subjects and tried to give responsive answers.

Image
CAROLYN FERRIS

This much we know: The yuppies are a new breed. They’re the first members of the electronic society. They’re the first crop of bewildered mutants climbing out of the muck of the industrial (late neolithic smokestack) age. ... These postwar kids were the first members of a new species, Homo sapiens electronicus.


Today it’s different The lecture committee arrives at the airport wearing three-piece suits, briefcases, clipboards with schedules. No music. No questions about Michael Jackson’s theory of reincarnation or Sheena Easton’s concept of sugar walls. The impudent grins are gone. The young people are cool, realistic, and corporate-minded. They question me about computer stocks, electronic books, and prospects for careers in software.

The phrase "young urban professionals” doesn’t tell us much. I guess the implication is that they are not ORAs (old rural amateurs). But who are they?


ANATOMY OF A YUPPIE

The phrase “young urban professionals” doesn’t tell us much. I guess the implication is that they are not ORAs (old rural amateurs). But who are they?

The moralists of both left and right can froth with righteous indignation about this army of selfish, career-oriented, entrepreneurial individualists who apparently value money and their own interests more than the lofty causes of yesteryear. But behind the trendy hype, we sense that the twitchy media may be reflecting some authentic change in the public consciousness. The yuppie myth expresses a vague sense that something different, something not yet understood but possibly meaningful, is happening in the day-to-day lives and dreams of young people growing up in this very unsettling world.

Surely it’s important to understand what’s going on with this most influential group of human beings on the planet—the 76 million materialistic, educated or streetwise, performance-driven Americans between the ages of 22 and 40.

This much we know: The yuppies are a new breed. They’re the first members of the electronic society. They’re the first crop of bewildered mutants climbing out of the muck of the industrial (late neolithic smokestack) age. They showed up on the scene in 1946, a watershed year, marking the end of World War II—the war that induced the birth of electronic technology: radar, sonar, atomic fission, computers. In 1946, this incredible high-tech gear was beginning to be available for civilian consumption.

Something else important happened in 1946. The birthrate in America unexpectedly doubled. Between 1946 and 1964, 76 million babies were born. That’s 40 million more than demographers predicted. These postwar kids w ere the first members of a new species, Homo sapiens electronicus. From the time they could peer out of the crib, they were exposed to a constant shower of information beaming from screens.

They were, right from the start, treated like no other generation in human history. Their parents raised them according to Dr. Benjamin Spock’s totally revolutionary theory of child care. “Treat your kids as individuals,” said Spock. “Tell them that they are special! Tell them to think for themselves. Feed them, not according to some factory schedule. Feed them on gourmet demand, i.e., let ’em eat what they want when they are hungry.”

This generation is the most intelligent group of human beings ever to inhabit the planet The best educated. The most widely traveled. The most sophisticated. They have grown up adapting to an accelerated rate of change that is almost incomprehensible. They became highly selective consumers, expecting to be rewarded because they are the best.

Let’s hasten to clear up one misconception here. This postwar generation of Spockies was not docilely manipulated by greedy admen or the cynical media. Nor was it the so-called imagemakers, the rock stars and television programmers and moviemakers, telling the kids what to do. Quite to the contrary. The Spockies themselves dictate to the imageers and marketeers about what they want.

BABY-BOOMERS GROW UP

The rapidly changing style and tone of American culture in the last four decades has reflected the elitist expectations of this Spock generation as it passed through the normal stages of maturation.

During the 1950s, kids were cleancut and easygoing. The tumultuous 1960s marked the stormy adolescence of this astonishing generation and bore the hippies, bands of cheerful, muddling sensualists and self-proclaimed dropouts. By the 1970s, Spockies were busy stopping the Vietnam War, peaceably overthrowing the Nixon administration, and mainly trying to figure out what to do with their lives. The 1980s brought us a new breed of individualists turned professional.

The 1950s are fondly remembered as the child-centered, home-based decade. Popular music, being most free from parental control, provided the clearest expression of youthful mood. The first stirrings of adolescence changed the beak Spockies wanted to wiggle their hips tentatively; so the hula-hoop craze swept the land. The music picked up the beat with rhythm ’n’ blues, rockabilly, rock ’n’ roll, the Surfer and the Motown sound. Just as cute, fuzzy caterpillars suddenly metamorphose into gaudy butterflies, so did the sweet, cuddly Mouseketeers moult into high-flying, highly visible, highly vulnerable hippies.

The Spockies emerging into teenage pubescence in the 1960s changed our traditional notions about sex, duty, work, conformity, and sacrifice. The postwar kids never really accepted the values of the industrial society or the aesthetics of the Depression era. They never bought the Protestant work ethic. After watching television six hours a day for fifteen years, would they settle docilely for a hard-hat job on the assembly line?

Bob Dylan set the tone for the adolescent rebellion: “Don’t follow leaders/ watch your parking meters.” The Beach Boys offered a California style of personal freedom. The Beatles picked up the theme of bouncy irreverence. It seemed so natural. All you need is love. Do your own thing. The 1960s were unflurried, unworried, more erotic than neurotic. We’re not gonna be wage slaves or fight the old men’s wars. We’re all gonna live in a yellow submarine!

It wasn’t just middle-class white males calling for changes. The blacks were ready. They had been waiting four hundred years. The race riots and the civil-rights protests and the freedom marches were an unexpected fallout of Spockian philosophy. It is hard to overestimate the effect of the black culture on the Spockie generation. There was the music, of course. The style, the grace, the coolness, the cynical zen detachment from the system came from the blacks. No white professor had to tell the blacks to turn on, tune in, and drop out of conformity.

Then there was the women’s liberation movement, perhaps the most significant change impulse of the century. This was the smartest, best-educated group of women in history, and they expected to be treated as individuals. And the gay-pride concept was stirring. Apparently their parents had read Spock, too. Not since the democratic, human-rights movements of the 18th Century had there been so much feverish hope for a fair and free social order.

Any predictions about the future that the yuppies are currently creating must be based on the fact that they are the first members of the information-communication culture.... Intelligence is their ethos and their model. They understand that the smart thing to do is to construct a peaceful, fair, just, compassionate social order.


But by the end of the decade it became apparent that utopia wasn’t going to happen that easily, for three obvious reasons:

1. There were powerful forces dead-set against any change in American culture.

2. There were no practical blueprints or role models for harnessing a vague philosophy of individualism into a functioning social order.

3. Basically, we were not quite ready: The Spockies were still kids outnumbered demographically and unprepared psychologically to create the postindustrial phase of human culture.

Back in the 1960s when I flew in for a lecture, the student committee showed up at the airport wearing long hair, sandals, blue jeans, and cheerful, impudent grins. The radio would be blasting... Today it's different. The lecture committee arrives at the airport wearing three- piece suits, briefcases, clipboards with schedules. No music.


The opposition to change had made itself very apparent in the cold-blooded assassinations of Jack Kennedy, brother Bobby, Malcolm X, and Martin Luther King, Jr. Lyndon Johnson, Richard Nixon, and the new cowboy governor of California, one R. Reagan, made it perfectly clear that they would happily use force to protect their system.

The social philosophy of the hippies was romantically impractical. Sure, they weren’t gonna work on Maggie’s farm no more, but what were they gonna do after balling all night long? Some retreated to gurus, others went back to a new form of anti-technological chic Amishness. Urban political activists parroted slogans of European or third-world socialism and made pop stars of totalitarian leaders like Che Guevara and Ho Chi Minh. The debacle at Altamont and the conjunction of overdose deaths of rock stars Joplin, Hendrix, and Morrison symbolized the end of the 1960s.

THE NEXT PHASE

By 1968, many young people had lost confidence in the old establishments. The phrase “Don’t trust anyone over 30” reflected a disillusioned realism; you couldn’t find answers in the grand ol' party of Nixon or the Democratic party of Hubert Humphrey. Big business and big labor were both unresponsive to the obvious need for change; the high ideals of socialism seemed to translate into just another word for police-state bureaucracy. By the end of the decade, it was also clear to any sensible young person that individualism and doing your own thing had a certain drawback. If you weren’t gonna work for Maggie’s pa no more, how were you gonna make out?

The obvious answer: You were gonna believe in yourself. That’s what the 1970s were all about More than 76 million Spockies reached the venerable age of 24 and faced a very practical challenge: Grow up!

The focus became self-improvement, EST, assertiveness training, personal excellence, career planning. Tom Wolfe, always the shrewd social critic, coined the term “the me-generation.”

Then the recession hit Arab-oil blackmail pushed up inflation rates. Adult society had no expansion-growth plans to harness the energies of 40 million extra people. Indeed, growing automation was reducing the work force. The Iran hostage crisis lowered morale. In the malaise of 1980, the voters chose the smiling Ronald Reagan over a frustrated Carter. Actually, the Spockies boycotted the election; so the country went to an aging man who proceeded to heat up the threat of nuclear war and run up an enormous national deficit, a debt to be paid by future generations.

Most young Americans today don’t want to be forced to work at jobs that can be done better by machines. They don’t want to stand on assembly lines repeating mindless tasks. Robots work. Citizens in socialist workers’ countries work. Grizzled veterans in the steel towns of Pennsylvania work. Third-world people have to work to survive.

What do self-respecting, intelligent, ambitious young Americans do? They perform. They master a craft. They learn to excel in a personal skill. They become entrepreneurs, i.e., people who organize, operate, and assume risks. They employ themselves, they train themselves, they promote themselves, they transfer themselves, they reward themselves.

They perform exactly those functions that can’t be done by CAD-CAM machines, however precisely programmed. They gravitate naturally to postindustrial fields—electronics, communication, education, merchandising, marketing, entertainment, skilled personal service, health and growth enterprises, leisure-time professions.

They are politically and psychologically independent They do not identity with company or union or partisan party. They do not depend on organizational tenure. They are notoriously nonloyal to institutions.  

The Yuppies as Free Agents

Before 1946, youngsters absorbed and joined their culture by means of personal observation of significant grown-ups. You watched the neighborhood doctor and the local carpenter and the nurse or the maiden aunt, and you drifted into a job. Books, sermons, magazine articles about heroic or antisocial figures also helped define the nature of the social game.

Television changed all that. The average American household watches television more than seven hours a day. This statistic means that yuppies learned about culture, absorbed the roles, rules, rituals, styles, and jargon of the game, not from personal observation but from television images. The cartoons, soap operas, prime-time dramas, and game shows tend to be escapist. The news broadcasts tend to feature victims and righteous whiners rather than successful role models. Politicians reciting rehearsed lies are not seen as credible heroes.

The only aspect of television that presents real people engaged in actions that are existentially true, credible, and scientifically objective are the sportscasts. This may explain the enormous media attention given to organized athletics. The average kid watches Fernando Valenzuela or Joe Montana or Kareem Abdul-Jabbar perform and is then exposed to endless interviews with and stories about these successful, self-made professionals. Their opinions, moods, physical ailments, philosophies, and lifestyles are presented in microscopic detail. People know more about Larry Bird as a "real person" than they do about Walter Mondale or George Bush or Dan Rather.

It can be argued that professional athletes were the first group to work out the tactics for surviving and excelling in a postindustrial world and have thus provided role models for the yuppies. Before the 1960s, professional athletic heroes were serfs indentured to baronial industrialists who literally owned them. The owners could trade them, fire them, pay them at whim. The rare athlete who "held out" was considered a troublemaker.

The first wave of athletes from the Spock generation hit the big leagues in the mid-1960s, and they immediately changed the rules of the game. In contrast to the older athletes, they were better educated, politically sophisticated, culturally hip individualists. In a curious way, young athletes accomplished the evolution in American society that the hippies were dreaming about. For starters, they eliminated their legal status as serfs. They became free agents, and hired their own lawyers and managers.

It was no accident that black athletes led this evolution. Wilt Chamberlain is credited as being the first super-pro to make gourmet demands on owners: first-class accommodations, hotel-room beds that fit his individual dimensions! Wilt was not a worker; he was a performer. He had figures to prove his worth. He understood that, through the magic of television, he and his colleagues were providing America with a new, personal style that was making fortunes for the owners and the networks.

A basic concept here was attitude. The post-Chamberlain players realized long before the yuppies that free agents have to depend on themselves. The players even had to violate management regulations to conduct their own programs of physical fitness. The grizzled, potbellied coaches were convinced that weight-training and personal-exercise programs would hinder performance.

The blacks started it, and then the women caught on. Billie Jean King and Chris Evert and Martina Navratilova demanded to be treated as individuals. And to add to the singularity, they made the public accept the fact that they ran their personal and sex lives according to their own gourmet styles. All this made a lot of sense to the kids. There was no way a 12-year-old could imitate Ronald Reagan, but every day in the playground, classroom, and video arcade, he could emulate the young professionals whom he saw performing on the screen.

The emergence of the electronic ministry and the television flock is pure 1980s. Preachers, like other professionals, are judged by their ratings.

Any predictions about the future that the yuppies are currently creating must be based on the fact that they are the first members of the information-communication culture. It is inevitable that they will become more realistic, more professional, more skilled. Intelligence is their ethos and their model. They understand that the smart thing to do is to construct a peaceful, fair, just, compassionate social order.


III.3. The Cyberpunk: The Individual as Reality pilot

Your true pilot cares nothing about anything on Earth but the river, and his pride in his occupation surpasses the pride of kings.

-- Mark Twain, Life on the Mississippi


"Cyber" means "pilot."

A "cyberperson" is one who pilots his/her own life. By definition, the cyberperson is fascinated by navigational information—especially maps, charts, labels, guides, manuals that help pilot one through life. The cyberperson continually searches for theories, models, paradigms, metaphors, images, icons that help chart and define the realities that we inhabit.

"Cybertech" refers to the tools, appliances, and methodologies of knowing and communicating. Linguistics. Philosophy. Semantics. Semiotics. Practical epistemologies. The ontologies of daily life. Words, icons, pencils, printing presses, screens, keyboards, computers, disks.

"Cyberpolitics" introduces the Foucault notions of the use of language and linguistic-tech by the ruling classes in feudal and industrial societies to control children, the uneducated, and the under classes. The words "governor" or "steersman" or "G-man" are used to describe those who manipulate words and communication devices in order to control, to bolster authority—feudal, management, government—and to discourage innovative thought and free exchange.

WHO IS THE CYBERPUNK?

Image

Cyberpunks use all available data-input to think for themselves.

You know who they are.

Every stage of history has produced names and heroic legends for the strong, stubborn, creative individuals who explore some future frontier, collect and bring back new information, and offer to guide the human gene pool to the next stage. Typically, these time mavericks combine bravery, and high curiosity, with super self-esteem. These three characteristics are considered necessary for those engaged in the profession of genetic guide, aka counterculture philosopher.

The classical Olde Westworld model for the cyberpunk is Prometheus, a technological genius who “stole” fire from the Gods and gave it to humanity. Prometheus also taught his gene pool many useful arts and sciences. According to the official version of the legend, he/she was exiled from the gene pool and sentenced to the ultimate torture for these unauthorized transmissions of classified information. In another version of the myth (unauthorized), Prometheus (aka the Pied Piper) uses his/her skills to escape the sinking kinship, taking with him/her the cream of the gene pool.

The Newe World version of this ancient myth is Quetzalcoatl, God of civilization, high-tech wizard who introduced maize, the calendar, erotic sculpture, flute-playing, the arts, and the sciences. He was driven into exile by the G-man in power, who was called Tezcatlipoca.

Self-assured singularities of the cyberbreed have been called mavericks, ronin, freelancers, independents, self-starters, nonconformists, oddballs, troublemakers, kooks, visionaries, iconoclasts, insurgents, blue-sky thinkers, loners, smart alecks. Before Gorbachev, the Soviets scornfully called them hooligans. Religious organizations have always called them heretics. Bureaucrats call them disloyal dissidents, traitors, or worse. In the old days, even sensible people called them mad.

They have been variously labeled clever, creative, entrepreneurial, imaginative, enterprising, fertile, ingenious, inventive, resourceful, talented, eccentric.

During the tribal, feudal, and industrial-literate phases of human evolution, the logical survival traits were conformity and dependability. The “good serf” or “vassal” was obedient The “good worker” or “manager” was reliable. Maverick thinkers were tolerated only at moments when innovation and change were necessary, usually to deal with the local competition.

In the information-communication civilization of the 21st Century, creativity and mental excellence will become the ethical norm. The world will be too dynamic, complex, and diversified, too cross-linked by the global immediacies of modern (quantum) communication, for stability of thought or dependability of behaviour to be successful. The “good persons” in the cybernetic society are the intelligent ones who can think for themselves. The “problem person” in the cybernetic society of the 21st Century is the one who automatically obeys, who never questions authority, who acts to protect his/her official status, who placates and politics rather than thinks independently.

Thoughtful Japanese are worried about the need for ronin thinking in their obedient culture, the postwar generation now taking over.

The classical Olde Westworld model for the cyberpunk is Prometheus, a technological genius who "stole” fire from the Gods and gave it to humanity.

Image

Prometheus also taught his gene pool many useful arts and sciences.


THE CYBERPUNK COUNTERCULTURE IN THE SOVIET UNION

The new postwar generation of Soviets caught on that new role models are necessary to compete in the information age. Under Gorbachev, bureaucratic control is being softened, made elastic to encourage some modicum of innovative, dissident thought!

Aleksandr N. Yakovlev, Politburo member and key strategist of the glasnost policy, describes that reform: “Fundamentally, we are talking about self-government We are moving toward a time when people will be able to govern themselves and control the activities of people that have been placed in the position of learning and governing them.

“It is not accidental that we are talking about self-government, or self-sufficiency and self-profitability of an enterprise, self-this and self-that. It all concerns the decentralization of power.”

The cyberpunk person, the pilot who thinks clearly and creatively, using quantum-electronic appliances and brain know-how, is the newest, updated, top-of-the-line model of the 21st Century: Homo sapiens sapiens cybernetics.

THE GREEK WORD FOR "PILOT”

A great pilot can sail even when his canvas is rent.

-- Lucius Annaeus Seneca


The term “cybernetics” comes from the Greek word kubernetes, “pilot.”

The Hellenic origin of this word is important in that it reflects the Socratic-Platonic traditions of independence and individual self-reliance which, we are told, derived from geography. The proud little Greek city-states were perched on peninsular fingers wiggling down into the fertile Mediterranean Sea, protected by mountains from the land-mass armies of Asia.

Mariners of those ancient days had to be bold and resourceful. Sailing the seven seas without maps or navigational equipment, they were forced to develop independence of thought. The self-reliance that these Hellenic pilots developed in their voyages probably carried over to the democratic, inquiring, questioning nature of their land life.

The Athenian cyberpunks, the pilots, made their own navigational decisions.

These psychogeographical factors may have contributed to the humanism of the Hellenic religions that emphasized freedom, pagan joy, celebration of life, and speculative thought. The humanist and polytheistic religions of ancient Greece are often compared with the austere morality of monotheistic Judaism, the fierce, dogmatic polarities of Persian-Arab dogma, and the imperial authority of Roman (Christian) culture.

THE ROMAN CONCEPT OF DIRECTOR, GOVERNOR. STEERSMAN

The Greek word kubernetes, when translated to Latin, comes out as gubernetes. This basic verb gubernare means to control the actions or behavior, to direct, to exercise sovereign authority, to regulate, to keep under, to restrain, to steer. This Roman concept is obviously very different from the Hellenic notion of “pilot.”

It may be relevant that the Latin term “to steer” comes from the word stare, which means “to stand,” with derivative meanings “place or thing which is standing.” The past participle of the Latin word produces “status,” “state,” “institute,” “statue,” “static,” “statistics,” “prostitute,” “restitute,” “constitute.”

In the information-communication civilization of the 21st Century, creativity and mental excellence will become the ethical norm. The world will be too dynamic, complex, and diversified, too cross-linked by the global immediacies of modern (quantum) communication, for stability of thought or dependability of behaviour to be successful.


CYBERPUNK PILOTS REPLACE GOVERNETICS-CONTROLLERS

Society everywhere is in conspiracy against the self-hood of every one of its members. The virtue in most request is conformity. Self-reliance is its aversion. It loves not realities and creators, but names and customs.

-- Ralph Waldo Emerson, Nature


Who so would be a man must be a nonconformist.

-- Emerson, op. cit.


The word “cybernetics” was coined in 1948 by Norbert Weiner, who wrote, “We have decided to call the entire field of control and communication theory, whether in the machine or in the animal, by the name of Cybernetics, which we form from the Greek for steersman. [sic]"

The word “cyber” has been redefined (in the American Heritage Dictionary) as “the theoretical study of control processes in electronic, mechanical, and biological systems, especially the flow of information in such systems.” The derivative word “cybernate” means “to control automatically by computer or to be so controlled.”

An even more ominous interpretation defines cybernetics as “the study of human control mechanisms and their replacement by mechanical or electronic systems.”

Note how Weiner and the Romanesque engineers have corrupted the meaning of “cyber.” The Greek word “pilot” becomes “governor” or “director”; the term “to steer” becomes “to control.”

Now we are liberating the term, teasing it free from serfdom to represent the autopoetic, self-directed principle of organization that arises in the universe in many systems of widely varying sizes, in people, societies, and atoms.

OUR OPPRESSIVE BIRTHRIGHT: THE POLITICS OF LITERACY

The etymological distinctions between Greek and Roman terms are quite relevant to the pragmatics of the culture surrounding their usage. French philosophy, for example, has recently stressed the importance of language and semiotics in determining human behaviour and social structures. Michel Foucault’s classic studies of linguistic politics and mind control led him to believe that
human consciousness—as expressed in speech and images, in self-definition and mutual designation... is the authentic locale of the determinant politics of being.... What men and women are born into is only superficially this or that social, legislative, and executive system. Their ambiguous, oppressive birthright is the language, the conceptual categories, the conventions of identification and perception which have evolved and, very largely, atrophied up to the time of their personal and social existence. It is the established but customarily subconscious, unargued constraints of awareness that enslave.


Orwell and Wittgenstein and McLuhan agree. To remove the means of expressing dissent is to remove the possibility of dissent. “Whereof one cannot speak, thereof must one remain silent.” In this light the difference between the Greek word “pilot” and the Roman translation “governor” becomes a most significant semantic manipulation, and the flexibility granted to symbol systems of all kinds by their representation in digital computers becomes dramatically liberating.

Do we pride ourselves for becoming ingenious “pilots” or dutiful “controllers”?

WHO, WHAT, AND WHY IS GOVERNETICS

Damn the torpedoes, full speed ahead.

-- Captain David Glasgow Farragut's order to his steersman at the Battle of Mobile Bay, August 5, 1864


Aye, aye, sir.

-- Unknown enlisted steersman at the Battle of Mobile Bay, August 5, 1864


The word “governetics” refers to an attitude of obedience-control in relationship to self or others. Pilots, those who navigate on the seven seas or in the sky, have to devise and execute course changes continually in response to the changing environment. They respond continually to feedback, information about the environment Dynamic. Alert Alive.

Cyber: The Greek word kubernetes, when translated to Latin, comes out as gubernetes. This basic verb gubernare means to control the actions or behavior, to direct, to exercise sovereign authority, to regulate, to keep under, to restrain, to steer. This Roman concept is obviously very different from the Hellenic notion of "pilot” [making their own navigational decisions].... the meaning of "cyber” has been corrupted. The Greek word "pilot” becomes "governor” or "director”; the term "to steer” becomes "to control.”... The terms "cybernetic person" or "cybernaut” return us to the original meaning of "pilot” and puts the self-reliant person back in the loop.


The Latinate “steersman,” by contrast, is in the situation of following orders. The Romans, we recall, were great organizers, road-builders, administrators. The galleys, the chariots must be controlled. The legions of soldiers must be directed.

The Hellenic concept of the individual navigating his/her own course was an island of humanism in a raging sea of totalitarian empires. To the East (the past) were the centralized, authoritarian kingdoms. The governors of Iran, from Cyrus, the Persian emperor, to the recent shah and ayatollah, have exemplified the highest traditions of state control.

The Greeks were flanked on the other side, which we shall designate as the West (or future), by a certain heavy concept called Rome. The caesars and popes of the Holy Roman Empire represented the next grand phase of institutional control. The governing hand on the wheel stands for stability, durability, continuity, permanence. Staying the course. Individual creativity, exploration, and change are usually not encouraged.

CYBERPUNKS: PILOTS OF THE SPECIES

“The winds and waves are always on the side of the ablest navigators."

-- Edward Gibbon


The terms “cybernetic person” or “cybernaut” return us to the original meaning of “pilot” and puts the self-reliant person back in the loop. These words (and the more pop term “cyberpunk”) refer to the personalization (and thus the popularization) of knowledge-information technology, to innovative thinking on the part of the individual.

According to McLuhan and Foucault, if you change the language, you change the society. Following their lead, we suggest that the terms “cybernetic person, cybernaut” may describe a new species model of human being and a new social order. “Cyberpunk” is, admittedly, a risky term. Like all linguistic innovations, it must be used with a tolerant sense of high-tech humor. It’s a stopgap, transitional meaning-grenade thrown over the language barricades to describe the resourceful, skillful individual who accesses and steers knowledge-communication technology toward his/her own private goals, for personal pleasure, profit, principle, or growth.

Cyberpunks are the inventors, innovative writers, technofrontier artists, risk-taking film directors, icon-shifting composers, stand-up comedians, expressionist artists, free-agent scientists, technocreatives, computer visionaries, elegant hackers, bit-blitting Prolog adepts, special-effectives, cognitive dissidents, video wizards, neurological test pilots, media explorers—all of those who boldly package and steer ideas out there where no thoughts have gone before.

Image

Countercultures are sometimes tolerated by the governors. They can, with sweet cynicism and patient humor, interface their singularity with institutions. They often work within the “governing systems” on a temporary basis.

As often as not, they are unauthorized.

THE LEGEND OF THE RONIN

The ronin ...has broken with the tradition of career feudalism. Guided by a personally defined code of adaptability, autonomy, and excellence, ronin are employing career strategies grounded in a premise of rapid change.

-- Beverly Potter, The Way of the Ronin


Ronin is used as a metaphor based on a Japanese word for lordless samurai. As early as the 8th Century, ronin was translated literally as “wave people” and used in Japan to describe those who had left their allotted, caste-predetermined stations in life: samurai who left the service of their feudal lords to become masterless.

Ronin played a key role in Japan's abrupt transition from a feudal society to industrialism. Under feudal rule, warriors were not allowed to think freely, or act according to their will. On the other hand, having been forced by circumstances to develop independence, [ronin] took more readily to new ideas and technology and became increasingly influential in the independent schools.

-- Potter, op. cit.


Image

The West has many historical parallels to the ronin archetype. The term “free lance” has its origin in the period after the Crusades, when a large number of knights were separated from their lords. Many lived by the code of chivalry and became “lances for hire.”

The American frontier was fertile ground for the ronin archetype. “Maverick,” derived from the Texan word for unbranded steer, was used to describe a free and self-directed individual.

Although many of the ronin's roots ...are in the male culture, most career women are well acquainted with the way of the ronin. Career women left their traditional stations and battled their way into the recesses of the male-dominated workplaces... Like the ronin who had no clan, professional women often feel excluded from the corporate cliques' inside tracks, without ally or mentor.

-- Potter, op. cit.
admin
Site Admin
 
Posts: 36135
Joined: Thu Aug 01, 2013 5:21 am

Re: Chaos & Cyberculture, by Timothy Leary, Ph.D.

Postby admin » Thu Jun 13, 2019 3:58 am

Part 2 of 4

SOME EXAMPLES OF CYBERPUNKS

Image

Christopher Columbus (1451-1506) was born in Genoa. At age 25 he showed up in Lisbon and learned the craft of map-making. This was the golden era of Portuguese exploration. Many pilots and navigators were convinced that the Earth was round, and that the Indies and other unknown lands could be found by crossing the western seas. What was special about Columbus was his persistence and eloquence in support of the dream of discovery. For more than ten years he traveled the courts of Europe attempting to make “the deal”; to find backing for his “enterprise of the Indies.”

According to the Columbia Encyclopedia, “Historians have disputed for centuries his skill as a navigator, but it has been recently proved that with only dead reckoning Columbus was unsurpassed in charting and finding his way about unknown seas.”

Columbus was a most unsuccessful governor of the colonies he had discovered. He died in disgrace, his cyberskills almost forgotten. (At least that’s what they tell us in the authorized history books.)

In 1992 the Political Correction Department dismissed Columbus as a racist colonialist.

1. COLUMBUS, THE INDIANS, AND HUMAN PROGRESS

Arawak men and women, naked, tawny, and full of wonder, emerged from their villages onto the island's beaches and swam out to get a closer look at the strange big boat. When Columbus and his sailors came ashore, carrying swords, speaking oddly, the Arawaks ran to greet them, brought them food, water, gifts. He later wrote of this in his log:

They ... brought us parrots and balls of cotton and spears and many other things, which they exchanged for the glass beads and hawks' bells. They willingly traded everything they owned.... They were well-built, with good bodies and handsome features.... They do not bear arms, and do not know them, for I showed them a sword, they took it by the edge and cut themselves out of ignorance. They have no iron. Their spears are made of cane... They would make fine servants.... With fifty men we could subjugate them all and make them do whatever we want.


These Arawaks of the Bahama Islands were much like Indians on the mainland, who were remarkable (European observers were to say again and again) for their hospitality, their belief in sharing. These traits did not stand out in the Europe of the Renaissance, dominated as it was by the religion of popes, the government of kings, the frenzy for money that marked Western civilization and its first messenger to the Americas, Christopher Columbus.

Columbus wrote:

As soon as I arrived in the Indies, on the first Island which I found, I took some of the natives by force in order that they might learn and might give me information of whatever there is in these parts.


The information that Columbus wanted most was: Where is the gold? He had persuaded the king and queen of Spain to finance an expedition to the lands, the wealth, he expected would be on the other side of the Atlantic -- the Indies and Asia, gold and spices. For, like other informed people of his time, he knew the world was round and he could sail west in order to get to the Far East.

Spain was recently unified, one of the new modern nation-states, like France, England, and Portugal. Its population, mostly poor peasants, worked for the nobility, who were 2 percent of the population and owned 95 percent of the land. Spain had tied itself to the Catholic Church, expelled all the Jews, driven out the Moors. Like other states of the modern world, Spain sought gold, which was becoming the new mark of wealth, more useful than land because it could buy anything.

There was gold in Asia, it was thought, and certainly silks and spices, for Marco Polo and others had brought back marvelous things from their overland expeditions centuries before. Now that the Turks had conquered Constantinople and the eastern Mediterranean, and controlled the land routes to Asia, a sea route was needed. Portuguese sailors were working their way around the southern tip of Africa. Spain decided to gamble on a long sail across an unknown ocean.

In return for bringing back gold and spices, they promised Columbus 10 percent of the profits, governorship over new-found lands, and the fame that would go with a new title: Admiral of the Ocean Sea. He was a merchant's clerk from the Italian city of Genoa, part-time weaver (the son of a skilled weaver), and expert sailor. He set out with three sailing ships, the largest of which was the Santa Maria, perhaps 100 feet long, and thirty-nine crew members.  

Columbus would never have made it to Asia, which was thousands of miles farther away than he had calculated, imagining a smaller world. He would have been doomed by that great expanse of sea. But he was lucky. One-fourth of the way there he came upon an unknown, uncharted land that lay between Europe and Asia -- the Americas. It was early October 1492, and thirty-three days since he and his crew had left the Canary Islands, off the Atlantic coast of Africa. Now they saw branches and sticks floating in the water. They saw flocks of birds. These were signs of land. Then, on October 12, a sailor called Rodrigo saw the early morning moon shining on white sands, and cried out. It was an island in the Bahamas, the Caribbean sea. The first man to sight land was supposed to get a yearly pension of 10,000 maravedis for life, but Rodrigo never got it. Columbus claimed he had seen a light the evening before. He got the reward.

So, approaching land, they were met by the Arawak Indians, who swam out to greet them. The Arawaks lived in village communes, had a developed agriculture of corn, yams, cassava. They could spin and weave, but they had no horses or work animals. They had no iron, but they wore tiny gold ornaments in their ears.

This was to have enormous consequences: it led Columbus to take some of them aboard ship as prisoners because he insisted that they guide him to the source of the gold. He then sailed to what is now Cuba, then to Hispaniola (the island which today consists of Haiti and the Dominican Republic). There, bits of visible gold in the rivers, and a gold mask presented to Columbus by a local Indian chief, led to wild visions of gold fields.

On Hispaniola, out of timbers from the Santa Maria, which had run aground, Columbus built a fort, the first European military base in the Western Hemisphere. He called it Navidad (Christmas) and left thirty-nine crewmembers there, with instructions to find and store the gold. He took more Indian prisoners and put them aboard his two remaining ships. At one part of the island he got into a fight with Indians who refused to trade as many bows and arrows as he and his men wanted. Two were run through with swords and bled to death. Then the Nina and the Pinta set sail for the Azores and Spain. When the weather turned cold, the Indian prisoners began to die.

Columbus's report to the Court in Madrid was extravagant. He insisted he had reached Asia (it was Cuba) and an island off the coast of China (Hispaniola). His descriptions were part fact, part fiction:

Hispaniola is a miracle. Mountains and hills, plains and pastures, are both fertile and beautiful ... the harbors are unbelievably good and there are many wide rivers of which the majority contain gold... There are many spices, and great mines of gold and other metals....


The Indians, Columbus reported, "are so naive and so free with their possessions that no one who has not witnessed them would believe it. When you ask for something they have, they never say no. To the contrary, they offer to share with anyone...." He concluded his report by asking for a little help from their Majesties, and in return he would bring them from his next voyage "as much gold as they need ... and as many slaves as they ask." He was full of religious talk: "Thus the eternal God, our Lord, gives victory to those who follow His way over apparent impossibilities."

Because of Columbus's exaggerated report and promises, his second expedition was given seventeen ships and more than twelve hundred men. The aim was clear: slaves and gold. They went from island to island in the Caribbean, taking Indians as captives. But as word spread of the Europeans' intent they found more and more empty villages. On Haiti, they found that the sailors left behind at Fort Navidad had been killed in a battle with the Indians, after they had roamed the island in gangs looking for gold, taking women and children as slaves for sex and labor.

Now, from his base on Haiti, Columbus sent expedition after expedition into the interior. They found no gold fields, but had to fill up the ships returning to Spain with some kind of dividend. In the year 1495, they went on a great slave raid, rounded up fifteen hundred Arawak men, women, and children, put them in pens guarded by Spaniards and dogs, then picked the five hundred best specimens to load onto ships. Of those five hundred, two hundred died en route. The rest arrived alive in Spain and were put up for sale by the archdeacon of the town, who reported that, although the slaves were "naked as the day they were born," they showed "no more embarrassment than animals." Columbus later wrote: "Let us in the name of the Holy Trinity go on sending all the slaves that can be sold."

But too many of the slaves died in captivity. And so Columbus, desperate to pay back dividends to those who had invested, had to make good his promise to fill the ships with gold. In the province of Cicao on Haiti, where he and his men imagined huge gold fields to exist, they ordered all persons fourteen years or older to collect a certain quantity of gold every three months. When they brought it, they were given copper tokens to hang around their necks. Indians found without a copper token had their hands cut off and bled to death.

The Indians had been given an impossible task. The only gold around was bits of dust garnered from the streams. So they fled, were hunted down with dogs, and were killed.

Trying to put together an army of resistance, the Arawaks faced Spaniards who had armor, muskets, swords, horses. When the Spaniards took prisoners they hanged them or burned them to death. Among the Arawaks, mass suicides began, with cassava poison. Infants were killed to save them from the Spaniards. In two years, through murder, mutilation, or suicide, half of the 250,000 Indians on Haiti were dead.

When it became clear that there was no gold left, the Indians were taken as slave labor on huge estates, known later as encomiendas. They were worked at a ferocious pace, and died by the thousands. By the year 1515, there were perhaps fifty thousand Indians left. By 1550, there were five hundred. A report of the year 1650 shows none of the original Arawaks or their descendants left on the island.

The chief source -- and, on many matters the only source -- of information about what happened on the islands after Columbus came is Bartolome de las Casas, who, as a young priest, participated in the conquest of Cuba. For a time he owned a plantation on which Indian slaves worked, but he gave that up and became a vehement critic of Spanish cruelty. Las Casas transcribed Columbus's journal and, in his fifties, began a multivolume History of the Indies. In it, he describes the Indians. They are agile, he says, and can swim long distances, especially the women. They are not completely peaceful, because they do battle from time to time with other tribes, but their casualties seem small, and they fight when they are individually moved to do so because of some grievance, not on the orders of captains or kings.

Women in Indian society were treated so well as to startle the Spaniards. Las Casas describes sex relations:

Marriage laws are non-existent: men and women alike choose their mates and leave them as they please, without offense, jealousy or anger. They multiply in great abundance; pregnant women work to the last minute and give birth almost painlessly; up the next day, they bathe in the river and are as clean and healthy as before giving birth. If they tire of their men, they give themselves abortions with herbs that force stillbirths, covering their shameful parts with leaves or cotton cloth; although on the whole, Indian men and women look upon total nakedness with as much casualness as we look upon a man's head or at his hands.


The Indians, Las Casas says, have no religion, at least no temples. They live in

large communal bell-shaped buildings, housing up to 600 people at one time ... made of very strong wood and roofed with palm leaves.... They prize bird feathers of various colors, beads made of fishbones, and green and white stones with which they adorn their ears and lips, but they put no value on gold and other precious things. They lack all manner of commerce, neither buying nor selling, and rely exclusively on their natural environment for maintenance. They are extremely generous with their possessions and by the same token covet the possessions of their friends and expect the same degree of liberality....


In Book Two of his History of the Indies, Las Casas (who at first urged replacing Indians by black slaves, thinking they were stronger and would survive, but later relented when he saw the effects on blacks) tells about the treatment of the Indians by the Spaniards. It is a unique account and deserves to be quoted at length:

Endless testimonies ... prove the mild and pacific temperament of the natives.... But our work was to exasperate, ravage, kill, mangle and destroy; small wonder, then, if they tried to kill one of us now and then.... The admiral, it is true, was blind as those who came after him, and he was so anxious to please the King that he committed irreparable crimes against the Indians....


Las Casas tells how the Spaniards "grew more conceited every day" and after a while refused to walk any distance. They "rode the backs of Indians if they were in a hurry" or were carried on hammocks by Indians running in relays." In this case they also had Indians carry large leaves to shade them from the sun and others to fan them with goose wings."

Total control led to total cruelty. The Spaniards "thought nothing of knifing Indians by tens and twenties and of cutting slices off them to test the sharpness of their blades." Las Casas tells how "two of these so-called Christians met two Indian boys one day, each carrying a parrot; they took the parrots and for fun beheaded the boys."

The Indians' attempts to defend themselves failed. And when they ran off into the hills they were found and killed. So, Las Casas reports, "they suffered and died in the mines and other labors in desperate silence, knowing not a soul in the world to whom they could turn for help." He describes their work in the mines:

... mountains are stripped from top to bottom and bottom to top a thousand times; they dig, split rocks, move stones, and carry dirt on their backs to wash it in the rivers, while those who wash gold stay in the water all the time with their backs bent so constantly it breaks them; and when water invades the mines, the most arduous task of all is to dry the mines by scooping up pansful of water and throwing it up outside....


After each six or eight months' work in the mines, which was the time required of each crew to dig enough gold for melting, up to a third of the men died.

While the men were sent many miles away to the mines, the wives remained to work the soil, forced into the excruciating job of digging and making thousands of hills for cassava plants.

Thus husbands and wives were together only once every eight or ten months and when they met they were so exhausted and depressed on both sides ... they ceased to procreate. As for the newly born, they died early because their mothers, overworked and famished, had no milk to nurse them, and for this reason, while I was in Cuba, 7000 children died in three months. Some mothers even drowned their babies from sheer desperation.... In this way, husbands died in the mines, wives died at work, and children died from lack of milk and in a short time this land which was so great, so powerful and fertile was depopulated .... My eyes have seen these acts so foreign to human nature, and now I tremble as I write....
 

When he arrived on Hispaniola in 1508, Las Casas says, "there were 60,000 people living on this island, including the Indians; so that from 1494 to 1508, over three million people had perished from war, slavery, and the mines. Who in future generations will believe this? I myself writing it as a knowledgeable eyewitness can hardly believe it...."

Thus began the history, five hundred years ago, of the European invasion of the Indian settlements in the Americas. That beginning, when you read Las Casas -- even if his figures are exaggerations (were there 3 million Indians to begin with, as he says, or less than a million, as some historians have calculated, or 8 million as others now believe?) -- is conquest, slavery, death. When we read the history books given to children in the United States, it all starts with heroic adventure -- there is no bloodshed -- and Columbus Day is a celebration.

Past the elementary and high schools, there are only occasional hints of something else. Samuel Eliot Morison, the Harvard historian, was the most distinguished writer on Columbus, the author of a multivolume biography, and was himself a sailor who retraced Columbus's route across the Atlantic. In his popular book Christopher Columbus, Mariner, written in 1954, he tells about the enslavement and the killing: "The cruel policy initiated by Columbus and pursued by his successors resulted in complete genocide."

That is on one page, buried halfway into the telling of a grand romance. In the book's last paragraph, Morison sums up his view of Columbus:

He had his faults and his defects, but they were largely the defects of the qualities that made him great -- his indomitable will, his superb faith in God and in his own mission as the Christ-bearer to lands beyond the seas, his stubborn persistence despite neglect, poverty and discouragement. But there was no flaw, no dark side to the most outstanding and essential of all his qualities -- his seamanship.


One can lie outright about the past. Or one can omit facts which might lead to unacceptable conclusions. Morison does neither. He refuses to lie about Columbus. He does not omit the story of mass murder; indeed he describes it with the harshest word one can use: genocide.

But he does something else -- he mentions the truth quickly and goes on to other things more important to him. Outright lying or quiet omission takes the risk of discovery which, when made, might arouse the reader to rebel against the writer. To state the facts, however, and then to bury them in a mass of other information is to say to the reader with a certain infectious calm: yes, mass murder took place, but it's not that important -- it should weigh very little in our final judgments; it should affect very little what we do in the world.

It is not that the historian can avoid emphasis of some facts and not of others. This is as natural to him as to the mapmaker, who, in order to produce a usable drawing for practical purposes, must first flatten and distort the shape of the earth, then choose out of the bewildering mass of geographic information those things needed for the purpose of this or that particular map.

My argument cannot be against selection, simplification, emphasis, which are inevitable for both cartographers and historians. But the mapmaker's distortion is a technical necessity for a common purpose shared by all people who need maps. The historian's distortion is more than technical, it is ideological; it is released into a world of contending interests, where any chosen emphasis supports (whether the historian means to or not) some kind of interest, whether economic or political or racial or national or sexual.

Furthermore, this ideological interest is not openly expressed in the way a mapmaker's technical interest is obvious ("This is a Mercator projection for long-range navigation -- for short-range, you'd better use a different projection"). No, it is presented as if all readers of history had a common interest which historians serve to the best of their ability. This is not intentional deception; the historian has been trained in a society in which education and knowledge are put forward as technical problems of excellence and not as tools for contending social classes, races, nations.  

To emphasize the heroism of Columbus and his successors as navigators and discoverers, and to deemphasize their genocide, is not a technical necessity but an ideological choice. It serves -- unwittingly -- to justify what was done.

My point is not that we must, in telling history, accuse, judge, condemn Columbus in absentia. It is too late for that; it would be a useless scholarly exercise in morality. But the easy acceptance of atrocities as a deplorable but necessary price to pay for progress (Hiroshima and Vietnam, to save Western civilization; Kronstadt and Hungary, to save socialism; nuclear proliferation, to save us all) -- that is still with us. One reason these atrocities are still with us is that we have learned to bury them in a mass of other facts, as radioactive wastes are buried in containers in the earth. We have learned to give them exactly the same proportion of attention that teachers and writers often give them in the most respectable of classrooms and textbooks. This learned sense of moral proportion, coming from the apparent objectivity of the scholar, is accepted more easily than when it comes from politicians at press conferences. It is therefore more deadly.

The treatment of heroes (Columbus) and their victims (the Arawaks) -- the quiet acceptance of conquest and murder in the name of progress -- is only one aspect of a certain approach to history, in which the past is told from the point of view of governments, conquerors, diplomats, leaders. It is as if they, like Columbus, deserve universal acceptance, as if they -- the Founding Fathers, Jackson, Lincoln, Wilson, Roosevelt, Kennedy, the leading members of Congress, the famous Justices of the Supreme Court -- represent the nation as a whole. The pretense is that there really is such a thing as "the United States," subject to occasional conflicts and quarrels, but fundamentally a community of people with common interests. It is as if there really is a "national interest" represented in the Constitution, in territorial expansion, in the laws passed by Congress, the decisions of the courts, the development of capitalism, the culture of education and the mass media.

"History is the memory of states," wrote Henry Kissinger in his first book, A World Restored, in which he proceeded to tell the history of nineteenth-century Europe from the viewpoint of the leaders of Austria and England, ignoring the millions who suffered from those statesmen's policies. From his standpoint, the "peace" that Europe had before the French Revolution was "restored" by the diplomacy of a few national leaders. But for factory workers in England, farmers in France, colored people in Asia and Africa, women and children everywhere except in the upper classes, it was a world of conquest, violence, hunger, exploitation -- a world not restored but disintegrated.

My viewpoint, in telling the history of the United States, is different: that we must not accept the memory of states as our own. Nations are not communities and never have been. The history of any country, presented as the history of a family, conceals fierce conflicts of interest (sometimes exploding, most often repressed) between conquerors and conquered, masters and slaves, capitalists and workers, dominators and dominated in race and sex. And in such a world of conflict, a world of victims and executioners, it is the job of thinking people, as Albert Camus suggested, not to be on the side of the executioners.

Thus, in that inevitable taking of sides which comes from selection and emphasis in history, I prefer to try to tell the story of the discovery of America from the viewpoint of the Arawaks, of the Constitution from the standpoint of the slaves, of Andrew Jackson as seen by the Cherokees, of the Civil War as seen by the New York Irish, of the Mexican war as seen by the deserting soldiers of Scott's army, of the rise of industrialism as seen by the young women in the Lowell textile mills, of the Spanish-American war as seen by the Cubans, the conquest of the Philippines as seen by black soldiers on Luzon, the Gilded Age as seen by southern farmers, the First World War as seen by socialists, the Second World War as seen by pacifists, the New Deal as seen by blacks in Harlem, the postwar American empire as seen by peons in Latin America. And so on, to the limited extent that any one person, however he or she strains, can "see" history from the standpoint of others.

My point is not to grieve for the victims and denounce the executioners. Those tears, that anger, cast into the past, deplete our moral energy for the present. And the lines are not always clear. In the long run, the oppressor is also a victim. In the short run (and so far, human history has consisted only of short runs), the victims, themselves desperate and tainted with the culture that oppresses them, turn on other victims.

Still, understanding the complexities, this book will be skeptical of governments and their attempts, through politics and culture, to ensnare ordinary people in a giant web of nationhood pretending to a common interest. I will try not to overlook the cruelties that victims inflict on one another as they are jammed together in the boxcars of the system. I don't want to romanticize them. But I do remember (in rough paraphrase) a statement I once read: "The cry of the poor is not always just, but if you don't listen to it, you will never know what justice is."

I don't want to invent victories for people's movements. But to think that history-writing must aim simply to recapitulate the failures that dominate the past is to make historians collaborators in an endless cycle of defeat. If history is to be creative, to anticipate a possible future without denying the past, it should, I believe, emphasize new possibilities by disclosing those hidden episodes of the past when, even if in brief flashes, people showed their ability to resist, to join together, occasionally to win. I am supposing, or perhaps only hoping, that our future may be found in the past's fugitive moments of compassion rather than in its solid centuries of warfare.

That, being as blunt as I can, is my approach to the history of the United States. The reader may as well know that before going on.

***

What Columbus did to the Arawaks of the Bahamas, Cortes did to the Aztecs of Mexico, Pizarro to the Incas of Peru, and the English settlers of Virginia and Massachusetts to the Powhatans and the Pequots.

The Aztec civilization of Mexico came out of the heritage of Mayan, Zapotec, and Toltec cultures. It built enormous constructions from stone tools and human labor, developed a writing system and a priesthood. It also engaged in (let us not overlook this) the ritual killing of thousands of people as sacrifices to the gods. The cruelty of the Aztecs, however, did not erase a certain innocence, and when a Spanish armada appeared at Vera Cruz, and a bearded white man came ashore, with strange beasts (horses), clad in iron, it was thought that he was the legendary Aztec man-god who had died three hundred years before, with the promise to return -- the mysterious Quetzalcoatl. And so they welcomed him, with munificent hospitality.

That was Hernando Cortes, come from Spain with an expedition financed by merchants and landowners and blessed by the deputies of God, with one obsessive goal: to find gold. In the mind of Montezuma, the king of the Aztecs, there must have been a certain doubt about whether Cortes was indeed Quetzalcoatl, because he sent a hundred runners to Cortes, bearing enormous treasures, gold and silver wrought into objects of fantastic beauty; but at the same time begging him to go back. (The painter Diller a few years later described what he saw just arrived in Spain from that expedition -- a sun of gold, a moon of silver, worth a fortune.)

Cortes then began his march of death from town to town, using deception, turning Aztec against Aztec, killing with the kind of deliberateness that accompanies a strategy -- to paralyze the will of the population by a sudden frightful deed. And so, in Cholulu, he invited the headmen of the Cholula nation to the square. And when they came, with thousands of unarmed retainers, Cortes's small army of Spaniards, posted around the square with cannon, armed with crossbows, mounted on horses, massacred them, down to the last man. Then they looted the city and moved on. When their cavalcade of murder was over they were in Mexico City, Montezuma was dead, and the Aztec civilization, shattered, was in the hands of the Spaniards.

All this is told in the Spaniards' own accounts.

In Peru, that other Spanish conquistador Pizarro, used the same tactics, and for the same reasons -- the frenzy in the early capitalist states of Europe for gold, for slaves, for products of the soil, to pay the bondholders and stockholders of the expeditions, to finance the monarchical bureaucracies rising in Western Europe, to spur the growth of the new money economy rising out of feudalism, to participate in what Karl Marx would later call "the primitive accumulation of capital." These were the violent beginnings of an intricate system of technology, business, politics, and culture that would dominate the world for the next five centuries.

In the North American English colonies, the pattern was set early, as Columbus had set it in the islands of the Bahamas. In 1585, before there was any permanent English settlement in Virginia, Richard Grenville landed there with seven ships. The Indians he met were hospitable, but when one of them stole a small silver cup, Grenville sacked and burned the whole Indian village.

Jamestown itself was set up inside the territory of an Indian confederacy, led by the chief, Powhatan. Powhatan watched the English settle on his people's land, but did not attack, maintaining a posture of coolness. When the English were going through their "starving time" in the winter of 1610, some of them ran off to join the Indians, where they would at least be fed. When the summer came, the governor of the colony sent a messenger to ask Powhatan to return the runaways, whereupon Powhatan, according to the English account, replied with "noe other than prowde and disdaynefull Answers." Some soldiers were therefore sent out "to take Revendge." They fell upon an Indian settlement, killed fifteen or sixteen Indians, burned the houses, cut down the corn growing around the village, took the queen of the tribe and her children into boats, then ended up throwing the children overboard "and shoteinge owtt their Braynes in the water." The queen was later taken off and stabbed to death.

Twelve years later, the Indians, alarmed as the English settlements kept growing in numbers, apparently decided to try to wipe them out for good. They went on a rampage and massacred 347 men, women, and children. From then on it was total war.

Not able to enslave the Indians, and not able to live with them, the English decided to exterminate them. Edmund Morgan writes, in his history of early Virginia, American Slavery, American Freedom:

Since the Indians were better woodsmen than the English and virtually impossible to track down, the method was to feign peaceful intentions, let them settle down and plant their corn wherever they chose, and then, just before harvest, fall upon them, killing as many as possible and burning the corn.... Within two or three years of the massacre the English had avenged the deaths of that day many times over.


In that first year of the white man in Virginia, 1607, Powhatan had addressed a plea to John Smith that turned out prophetic. How authentic it is may be in doubt, but it is so much like so many Indian statements that it may be taken as, if not the rough letter of that first plea, the exact spirit of it:

I have seen two generations of my people die.... I know the difference between peace and war better than any man in my country. I am now grown old, and must die soon; my authority must descend to my brothers, Opitchapan, Opechancanough and Catatough -- then to my two sisters, and then to my two daughters. I wish them to know as much as I do, and that your love to them may be like mine to you. Why will you take by force what you may have quietly by love? Why will you destroy us who supply you with food? What can you get by war? We can hide our provisions and run into the woods; then you will starve for wronging your friends. Why are you jealous of us? We are unarmed, and willing to give you what you ask, if you come in a friendly manner, and not so simple as not to know that it is much better to eat good meat, sleep comfortably, live quietly with my wives and children, laugh and be merry with the English, and trade for their copper and hatchets, than to run away from them, and to lie cold in the woods, feed on acorns, roots and such trash, and be so hunted that I can neither eat nor sleep. In these wars, my men must sit up watching, and if a twig break, they all cry out "Here comes Captain Smith!" So I must end my miserable life. Take away your guns and swords, the cause of all our jealousy, or you may all die in the same manner.


When the Pilgrims came to New England they too were coming not to vacant land but to territory inhabited by tribes of Indians. The governor of the Massachusetts Bay Colony, John Winthrop, created the excuse to take Indian land by declaring the area legally a "vacuum." The Indians, he said, had not "subdued" the land, and therefore had only a "natural" right to it, but not a "civil right." A "natural right" did not have legal standing.

The Puritans also appealed to the Bible, Psalms 2:8: "Ask of me, and I shall give thee, the heathen for thine inheritance, and the uttermost parts of the earth for thy possession." And to justify their use of force to take the land, they cited Romans 13:2: "Whosoever therefore resisteth the power, resisteth the ordinance of God: and they that resist shall receive to themselves damnation."

The Puritans lived in uneasy truce with the Pequot Indians, who occupied what is now southern Connecticut and Rhode Island. But they wanted them out of the way; they wanted their land. And they seemed to want also to establish their rule firmly over Connecticut settlers in that area. The murder of a white trader, Indian-kidnaper, and troublemaker became an excuse to make war on the Pequots in 1636.

A punitive expedition left Boston to attack the Narragansett Indians on Block Island, who were lumped with the Pequots. As Governor Winthrop wrote:

They had commission to put to death the men of Block Island, but to spare the women and children, and to bring them away, and to take possession of the island; and from thence to go to the Pequods to demand the murderers of Captain Stone and other English, and one thousand fathom of wampom for damages, etc. and some of their children as hostages, which if they should refuse, they were to obtain it by force.
 

The English landed and killed some Indians, but the rest hid in the thick forests of the island and the English went from one deserted village to the next, destroying crops. Then they sailed back to the mainland and raided Pequot villages along the coast, destroying crops again. One of the officers of that expedition, in his account, gives some insight into the Pequots they encountered: "The Indians spying of us came running in multitudes along the water side, crying, What cheer, Englishmen, what cheer, what do you come for? They not thinking we intended war, went on cheerfully. ..."

So, the war with the Pequots began. Massacres took place on both sides. The English developed a tactic of warfare used earlier by Cortes and later, in the twentieth century, even more systematically: deliberate attacks on noncombatants for the purpose of terrorizing the enemy. This is ethnohistorian Francis Jennings's interpretation of Captain John Mason's attack on a Pequot village on the Mystic River near Long Island Sound: "Mason proposed to avoid attacking Pequot warriors, which would have overtaxed his unseasoned, unreliable troops. Battle, as such, was not his purpose. Battle is only one of the ways to destroy an enemy's will to fight. Massacre can accomplish the same end with less risk, and Mason had determined that massacre would be his objective."

So the English set fire to the wigwams of the village. By their own account: "The Captain also said, We must Burn Them; and immediately stepping into the Wigwam ... brought out a Fire Brand, and putting it into the Matts with which they were covered, set the Wigwams on Fire." William Bradford, in his History of the Plymouth Plantation written at the time, describes John Mason's raid on the Pequot village:

Those that scaped the fire were slaine with the sword; some hewed to peeces, others rune throw with their rapiers, so as they were quickly dispatchte, and very few escaped. It was conceived they thus destroyed about 400 at this time. It was a fearful sight to see them thus frying in the fyer, and the streams of blood quenching the same, and horrible was the stincke and sente there of, but the victory seemed a sweete sacrifice, and they gave the prayers thereof to God, who had wrought so wonderfully for them, thus to inclose their enemise in their hands, and give them so speedy a victory over so proud and insulting an enimie.


As Dr. Cotton Mather, Puritan theologian, put it: "It was supposed that no less than 600 Pequot souls were brought down to hell that day."

The war continued. Indian tribes were used against one another, and never seemed able to join together in fighting the English. Jennings sums up:

The terror was very real among the Indians, but in time they came to meditate upon its foundations. They drew three lessons from the Pequot War: (1) that the Englishmen's most solemn pledge would be broken whenever obligation conflicted with advantage; (2) that the English way of war had no limit of scruple or mercy; and (3) that weapons of Indian making were almost useless against weapons of European manufacture. These lessons the Indians took to heart.


A footnote in Virgil Vogel's book This Land Was Ours (1972) says: "The official figure on the number of Pequots now in Connecticut is twenty-one persons."

Forty years after the Pequot War, Puritans and Indians fought again. This time it was the Wampanoags, occupying the south shore of Massachusetts Bay, who were in the way and also beginning to trade some of their land to people outside the Massachusetts Bay Colony. Their chief, Massasoit, was dead. His son Wamsutta had been killed by Englishmen, and Wamsutta's brother Metacom (later to be called King Philip by the English) became chief. The English found their excuse, a murder which they attributed to Metacom, and they began a war of conquest against the Wampanoags, a war to take their land. They were clearly the aggressors, but claimed they attacked for preventive purposes. As Roger Williams, more friendly to the Indians than most, put it: "All men of conscience or prudence ply to windward, to maintain their wars to be defensive."

Jennings says the elite of the Puritans wanted the war; the ordinary white Englishman did not want it and often refused to fight. The Indians certainly did not want war, but they matched atrocity with atrocity. When it was over, in 1676, the English had won, but their resources were drained; they had lost six-hundred men. Three thousand Indians were dead, including Metacom himself. Yet the Indian raids did not stop.

For a while, the English tried softer tactics. But ultimately, it was back to annihilation. The Indian population of 10 million that lived north of Mexico when Columbus came would ultimately be reduced to less than a million. Huge numbers of Indians would die from diseases introduced by the whites. A Dutch traveler in New Netherland wrote in 1656 that "the Indians ... affirm, that before the arrival of the Christians, and before the smallpox broke out amongst them, they were ten times as numerous as they now are, and that their population had been melted down by this disease, whereof nine-tenths of them have died." When the English first settled Martha's Vineyard in 1642, the Wampanoags there numbered perhaps three thousand. There were no wars on that island, but by 1764, only 313 Indians were left there. Similarly, Block Island Indians numbered perhaps 1,200 to 1,500 in 1662, and by 1774 were reduced to fifty-one.

Behind the English invasion of North America, behind their massacre of Indians, their deception, their brutality, was that special powerful drive born in civilizations based on private property. It was a morally ambiguous drive; the need for space, for land, was a real human need. But in conditions of scarcity, in a barbarous epoch of history ruled by competition, this human need was transformed into the murder of whole peoples. Roger Williams said it was

a depraved appetite after the great vanities, dreams and shadows of this vanishing life, great portions of land, land in this wilderness, as if men were in as great necessity and danger for want of great portions of land, as poor, hungry, thirsty seamen have, after a sick and stormy, a long and starving passage. This is one of the gods of New England, which the living and most high Eternal will destroy and famish.


Was all this bloodshed and deceit -- from Columbus to Cortes, Pizarro, the Puritans -- a necessity for the human race to progress from savagery to civilization? Was Morison right in burying the story of genocide inside a more important story of human progress? Perhaps a persuasive argument can be made -- as it was made by Stalin when he killed peasants for industrial progress in the Soviet Union, as it was made by Churchill explaining the bombings of Dresden and Hamburg, and Truman explaining Hiroshima. But how can the judgment be made if the benefits and losses cannot be balanced because the losses are either unmentioned or mentioned quickly?

That quick disposal might be acceptable ("Unfortunate, yes, but it had to be done") to the middle and upper classes of the conquering and "advanced" countries. But is it acceptable to the poor of Asia, Africa, Latin America, or to the prisoners in Soviet labor camps, or the blacks in urban ghettos, or the Indians on reservations -- to the victims of that progress which benefits a privileged minority in the world? Was it acceptable (or just inescapable?) to the miners and railroaders of America, the factory hands, the men and women who died by the hundreds of thousands from accidents or sickness, where they worked or where they lived -- casualties of progress? And even the privileged minority -- must it not reconsider, with that practicality which even privilege cannot abolish, the value of its privileges, when they become threatened by the anger of the sacrificed, whether in organized rebellion, unorganized riot, or simply those brutal individual acts of desperation labeled crimes by law and the state?

If there are necessary sacrifices to be made for human progress, is it not essential to hold to the principle that those to be sacrificed must make the decision themselves? We can all decide to give up something of ours, but do we have the right to throw into the pyre the children of others, or even our own children, for a progress which is not nearly as clear or present as sickness or health, life or death?

What did people in Spain get out of all that death and brutality visited on the Indians of the Americas? For a brief period in history, there was the glory of a Spanish Empire in the Western Hemisphere. As Hans Koning sums it up in his book Columbus: His Enterprise:

For all the gold and silver stolen and shipped to Spain did not make the Spanish people richer. It gave their kings an edge in the balance of power for a time, a chance to hire more mercenary soldiers for their wars. They ended up losing those wars anyway, and all that was left was a deadly inflation, a starving population, the rich richer, the poor poorer, and a ruined peasant class.


Beyond all that, how certain are we that what was destroyed was inferior? Who were these people who came out on the beach and swam to bring presents to Columbus and his crew, who watched Cortes and Pizarro ride through their countryside, who peered out of the forests at the first white settlers of Virginia and Massachusetts?

Columbus called them Indians, because he miscalculated the size of the earth. In this book we too call them Indians, with some reluctance, because it happens too often that people are saddled with names given them by their conquerors.

And yet, there is some reason to call them Indians, because they did come, perhaps 25,000 years ago, from Asia, across the land bridge of the Bering Straits (later to disappear under water) to Alaska. Then they moved southward, seeking warmth and land, in a trek lasting thousands of years that took them into North America, then Central and South America. In Nicaragua, Brazil, and Ecuador their petrified footprints can still be seen, along with the print of bison, who disappeared about five thousand years ago, so they must have reached South America at least that far back.

Widely dispersed over the great land mass of the Americas, they numbered approximately 75 million people by the time Columbus came, perhaps 25 million in North America. Responding to the different environments of soil and climate, they developed hundreds of different tribal cultures, perhaps two thousand different languages. They perfected the art of agriculture, and figured out how to grow maize (corn), which cannot grow by itself and must be planted, cultivated, fertilized, harvested, husked, shelled. They ingeniously developed a variety of other vegetables and fruits, as well as peanuts and chocolate and tobacco and rubber.

On their own, the Indians were engaged in the great agricultural revolution that other peoples in Asia, Europe, Africa were going through about the same time.

While many of the tribes remained nomadic hunters and food gatherers in wandering, egalitarian communes, others began to live in more settled communities where there was more food, larger populations, more divisions of labor among men and women, more surplus to feed chiefs and priests, more leisure time for artistic and social work, for building houses. About a thousand years before Christ, while comparable constructions were going on in Egypt and Mesopotamia, the Zuni and Hopi Indians of what is now New Mexico had begun to build villages consisting of large terraced buildings, nestled in among cliffs and mountains for protection from enemies, with hundreds of rooms in each village. Before the arrival of the European explorers, they were using irrigation canals, dams, were doing ceramics, weaving baskets, making cloth out of cotton.

By the time of Christ and Julius Caesar, there had developed in the Ohio River Valley a culture of so-called Moundbuilders, Indians who constructed thousands of enormous sculptures out of earth, sometimes in the shapes of huge humans, birds, or serpents, sometimes as burial sites, sometimes as fortifications. One of them was 3-1/2 miles long, enclosing 100 acres. These Moundbuilders seem to have been part of a complex trading system of ornaments and weapons from as far off as the Great Lakes, the Far West, and the Gulf of Mexico.

About A.D. 500, as this Moundbuilder culture of the Ohio Valley was beginning to decline, another culture was developing westward, in the valley of the Mississippi, centered on what is now St. Louis. It had an advanced agriculture, included thousands of villages, and also built huge earthen mounds as burial and ceremonial places near a vast Indian metropolis that may have had thirty thousand people. The largest mound was 100 feet high, with a rectangular base larger than that of the Great Pyramid of Egypt. In the city, known as Cahokia, were toolmakers, hide dressers, potters, jewelrymakers, weavers, saltmakers, copper engravers, and magnificent ceramists. One funeral blanket was made of twelve thousand shell beads.

From the Adirondacks to the Great Lakes, in what is now Pennsylvania and upper New York, lived the most powerful of the northeastern tribes, the League of the Iroquois, which included the Mohawks (people of the Flint), Oneidas (people of the Stone), Onondagas (people of the Mountain), Cayugas (People at the Landing), and Senecas (Great Hill People), thousands of people bound together by a common Iroquois language.

In the vision of the Mohawk chief Hiawatha, the legendary Dekaniwidah spoke to the Iroquois: "We bind ourselves together by taking hold of each other's hands so firmly and forming a circle so strong that if a tree should fall upon it, it could not shake nor break it, so that our people and grandchildren shall remain in the circle in security, peace and happiness."

In the villages of the Iroquois, land was owned in common and worked in common. Hunting was done together, and the catch was divided among the members of the village. Houses were considered common property and were shared by several families. The concept of private ownership of land and homes was foreign to the Iroquois. A French Jesuit priest who encountered them in the 1650s wrote: "No poorhouses are needed among them, because they are neither mendicants nor paupers.... Their kindness, humanity and courtesy not only makes them liberal with what they have, but causes them to possess hardly anything except in common."

Women were important and respected in Iroquois society. Families were matrilineal. That is, the family line went down through the female members, whose husbands joined the family, while sons who married then joined their wives' families. Each extended family lived in a "long house." When a woman wanted a divorce, she set her husband's things outside the door.

Families were grouped in clans, and a dozen or more clans might make up a village. The senior women in the village named the men who represented the clans at village and tribal councils. They also named the forty-nine chiefs who were the ruling council for the Five Nation confederacy of the Iroquois. The women attended clan meetings, stood behind the circle of men who spoke and voted, and removed the men from office if they strayed too far from the wishes of the women.

The women tended the crops and took general charge of village affairs while the men were always hunting or fishing. And since they supplied the moccasins and food for warring expeditions, they had some control over military matters. As Gary B. Nash notes in his fascinating study of early America, Red, White, and Black: "Thus power was shared between the sexes and the European idea of male dominancy and female subordination in all things was conspicuously absent in Iroquois society."

Children in Iroquois society, while taught the cultural heritage of their people and solidarity with the tribe, were also taught to be independent, not to submit to overbearing authority. They were taught equality in status and the sharing of possessions. The Iroquois did not use harsh punishment on children; they did not insist on early weaning or early toilet training, but gradually allowed the child to learn self-care.

All of this was in sharp contrast to European values as brought over by the first colonists, a society of rich and poor, controlled by priests, by governors, by male heads of families. For example, the pastor of the Pilgrim colony, John Robinson, thus advised his parishioners how to deal with their children: "And surely there is in all children ... a stubbornness, and stoutness of mind arising from natural pride, which must, in the first place, be broken and beaten down; that so the foundation of their education being laid in humility and tractableness, other virtues may, in their time, be built thereon."

Gary Nash describes Iroquois culture:

No laws and ordinances, sheriffs and constables, judges and juries, or courts or jails -- the apparatus of authority in European societies -- were to be found in the northeast woodlands prior to European arrival. Yet boundaries of acceptable behavior were firmly set. Though priding themselves on the autonomous individual, the Iroquois maintained a strict sense of right and wrong.... He who stole another's food or acted invalourously in war was "shamed" by his people and ostracized from their company until he had atoned for his actions and demonstrated to their satisfaction that he had morally purified himself.


Not only the Iroquois but other Indian tribes behaved the same way. In 1635, Maryland Indians responded to the governor's demand that if any of them killed an Englishman, the guilty one should be delivered up for punishment according to English law. The Indians said:

It is the manner amongst us Indians, that if any such accident happen, wee doe redeeme the life of a man that is so slaine, with a 100 armes length of Beades and since that you are heere strangers, and come into our Countrey, you should rather conform yourselves to the Customes of our Countrey, than impose yours upon us. ...


So, Columbus and his successors were not coming into an empty wilderness, but into a world which in some places was as densely populated as Europe itself, where the culture was complex, where human relations were more egalitarian than in Europe, and where the relations among men, women, children, and nature were more beautifully worked out than perhaps any place in the world.

They were people without a written language, but with their own laws, their poetry, their history kept in memory and passed on, in an oral vocabulary more complex than Europe's, accompanied by song, dance, and ceremonial drama. They paid careful attention to the development of personality, intensity of will, independence and flexibility, passion and potency, to their partnership with one another and with nature.

John Collier, an American scholar who lived among Indians in the 1920s and 1930s in the American Southwest, said of their spirit: "Could we make it our own, there would be an eternally inexhaustible earth and a forever lasting peace."

Perhaps there is some romantic mythology in that. But the evidence from European travelers in the sixteenth, seventeenth, and eighteenth centuries, put together recently by an American specialist on Indian life, William Brandon, is overwhelmingly supportive of much of that "myth." Even allowing for the imperfection of myths, it is enough to make us question, for that time and ours, the excuse of progress in the annihilation of races, and the telling of history from the standpoint of the conquerors and leaders of Western civilization.

-- A People's History of the United States: 1492-Present, by Howard Zinn
admin
Site Admin
 
Posts: 36135
Joined: Thu Aug 01, 2013 5:21 am

Re: Chaos & Cyberculture, by Timothy Leary, Ph.D.

Postby admin » Thu Jun 13, 2019 3:58 am

Part 3 of 4

Image

Mark Twain. He purchased the Remington typewriter when it appeared in 1874 for $125. In 1875 he became the first author in history to submit a typewritten manuscript to a publisher. It was The Adventures of Tom Sawyer.

“This newfangled writing machine,” Twain wrote, “has several virtues. It piles an awful stack of words on one page. It don’t muss things or scatter ink blots around. Of course it saves paper.”

Mathias (Rusty) Rust, a 19-year-old loner from Hamburg, Germany, attained all-star status as a cyberpunk when, on May 28,1987, he flew a one-engine Cessna through the “impenetrable” Soviet air defenses and landed in Moscow’s Red Square. There were no gubernal or organizational motives. The technological adventure was a personal mission. Rusty just wanted to talk to some Russians. German newspapers celebrated the event, calling it “the stuff of dreams,” and comparing the youth to the Red Baron Manfred von Richthofen and Charles Augustus Lindbergh.

THE CYBERPUNK CODE: TFYQA

War Games is an electronic quantum signal, a movie about high-tech computers and human evolution that illustrates and condemns the use of quantum-electronic knowledge technology by governors to control. The film celebrates the independence and skill of cyberpunks who think for themselves and innovate from within the static system. The Captain and his wife use high-tech agriculture methods to enhance the potency of unauthorized botanical neuroactivators. The Captain makes an unauthorized decision to abort World War II. In both instances the Captain follows the cyberpunk code: Think for yourself; question authority (TFYQA).

The cyberkid Matthew Broderick is equally courageous, outrageous, creative, and bright. When the audience is introduced to the hero of War Games, he is in a video arcade playing a space-adventure game with poise and proficiency. An electron jock.

Late for school, he’s pulled into the classic confrontation: the authoritarian teacher humiliates and punishes the Tom Sawyer kid, sends him to the principal’s office. There he obtains the code for the school’s computer system. Back home, he uses his PC to access the school records. He changes an unfair grade to a passing level. He thinks for himself and questions authority.

At the crucial moment he rushes to the library and researches the life of a physicist, scans scientific journals, scopes microfilm files—not to please the system, but in pursuit of his own personal grail.

Note that there is a new dimension of electronic ethics and quantum legality here. The Captain and Matthew perform no act of physical violence, no theft of material goods. The Captain processes some computer data and decides for himself. Matthew rearranges clusters of electrons stored on a chip. They seek independence, not control over others.

THE CYBERPUNK AS ROLE MODEL FOR THE 21ST CENTURY

Image

The tradition of the “individual who thinks for him/herself” extends to the beginnings of recorded human history. Indeed, the very label of our species, Homo sapiens, defines us as the animals who think.

If our genetic function is computare (“to think”), then it follows that the ages and stages of human history, so far, have been larval or preparatory. After the insectoid phases of submission to gene pools, the mature stage of the human life cycle is the individual who thinks for him/herself. Now, at the beginnings of the information age, are we ready to assume our genetic function?

The "good persons" in the cybernetic society are the intelligent ones who can think for themselves. The "problem person” in the cybernetic society of the 21st Century is the one who automatically obeys, who never questions authority, who acts to protect his/her official status, who placates and politics rather than thinks independently.


Image
ANDY FRITH

III.4. The New Breed

Memes: Self-replicating ideas that sweep across human populations, bringing about cultural mutations.

Neoteny: (1) attainment of improved functional maturity during the larval stage; (2) retention of survivally optimal larval or immature characters as adults, i.e., refusal to stop growing, extension of the developmental period.

**********************************************

November 9, 1989. None of us will forget those pictures of that menacing meme-icon, the Berlin Wall, crumbling in minds all over the world. We saw the faces of those young, upwardly mobile people in blue jeans and white running shoes who, for the first time in their lives, were experiencing self-navigation, free to choose their life options outside the control of the authorities.

November 24, 1989. The demonstrations in Prague led to a nationwide strike. Grizzled, hard-hat workers marched out of the factories shouting, "Long live the students!" The next day, the Czech hard-line regime resigned.

December 28, 1989. The repressive regime of Nikolae Ceausescu has fallen.

"It was a children's revolution," said an elderly woman to a reporter.

"Yes, the students," a young woman said.

"No, no, not students," a woman said. "The children. Our children saved us. They did this for us." (Los Angeles Times, 12/29/89).


It had finally happened: the inevitable and long-awaited climax of the youth revolutions. “They aren’t going to work on Brezhnev’s farm no more.” The Dr. Spock-memes of self-direction had swept the world in less than three decades.

This is not a political revolution; it’s more like a cultural evolution. A tsunami of electronic information. The emergence of a new breed. Young people all over the world are mutated, as Marshall McLuhan predicted, by highly communicable memes: documentary footage, rock ’n’ roll music, MTV, pirate broadcasts, all coming to them through American-Japanese television screens. This new breed is centered on self-direction and individual choice, a genetic revulsion for partisan politics, a species horror of centralized governments.

This global youth movement cannot be discussed in the terms of politics or sociology or psychology. We are dealing with a new, post-Darwinian, genetic science.

This emergence of youth power has been called sociogenetics, cybernetic evolution, cultural genetics, memetics. It has to do with the communication and transmission of new ideas and attitudes. Dawkins has suggested the word “memes” to describe these self-replicating ideas that sweep across human populations, bringing about cultural mutations.

In the last thirty years, we have witnessed a new breed emerging during the juvenile stage of industrial-age society. (The key word here is juvenile, as opposed to adult Adult is the past participle of the verb “to grow.”) This new breed appeared when enormous numbers of individuals in the juvenile stage began intercommunicating some new memes, mutating together at the same time. The Japanese brand of this youth movement call themselves Ho Ko Ten, “the new society.”

Biological evolution works through the competitive spread of genes. Logically, the mechanism of cultural change involves communication. Individuals are activated to change when they pick up new meme-signals from others of their cohort The mode of communication determines not just the speed of the change, but the nature of the change.

THE MEDIUM IS THE MESSAGE OF CULTURAL EVOLUTION

The Ten Commandments, chiseled on stone tablets, created a fundamentalist culture that discouraged change and democratic participation. There is one God, the author-creator, and his words are eternally true. This stone-tablet meme-carrier spawns a culture ruled by the inerrant “good book” and a priesthood of those who preserve, interpret, and enforce the commandments.

The printing press mass-disseminates memes that create a factory culture run by managers.

The electronic, McLuhanesque meme-signals that produced Woodstock nation and the Berlin Wall deconstruction are more a matter of attitude and style.

The television news has trained us to recognize “the robe-memes”—the feudal pope (or the Iranian mullah) and his solemn piety-reeking priests. We recognize “the suits,” the adult politicians of the industrial age, with their no-nonsense sobriety. We observe “the uniforms,” armed, booted, helmeted.

And since 1966, we have observed this new breed, “the students” who tend to wear blue jeans and running shoes. Their dress and gestural signals are as important as the identifying markings and scents of different species of mammals. Just like any new breed of mammals, these kids recognize each other across national boundaries. The faces of the Chinese youth shine with that same glow as the faces photographically captured in Berlin and Prague and—twenty years previously—in Woodstock.

IN A CYBERNETIC CULTURE, DEMOCRACY BECOMES PRIME-TIME AUTHORITARIANISM

It is important to note that these students are not demonstrating for “socialist democracy” or “capitalist democracy.” They are for “individual freedom.” In the cybernetic age, “democracy” becomes majority-mob rule and the enemy of individual freedom.

Democracy works just fine in a preindustrial, oral society in which the men walk or ride horses to the village center and talk things over. Industrial societies produce a factory system of politics run by managers. Representative government involves full-time professional politicians and partisan parties. The dismal results are predictable.

As soon as cybernetic communication appliances emerged, political power was seized by those who control the airwaves. We’ve seen this since the rise of fascism and totalitarianism. American elections of 1980,1984,1988 produced an ominous demonstration of tele-democracy in a centralized country.

Less than 50 percent of the eligible voters bothered to register or vote in these three presidential elections. More than half of adult Americans were so disillusioned, apathetic, bored that they made the intelligent decision to vote, in absentia, for “none of the above.” According to exit polls, more than half of voting Americans glumly admitted that they were choosing “the lesser of two evils.”

Reagan and Bush were elected by around 25 percent of the citizenry. The only ones who really cared about these elections were those who stood to benefit financially from the results. The “apparatchiks” and government-payrolled “nomenclatura” of the two contending “parties” choose the “leaders” who would preside over division of the spoils.

History will note that the 1980s regimes of Reagan-Bush exquisitely mirrored the Brezhnevian anomie in the Soviet Union. It is now shockingly clear that the Republican party in this country plays the role of the Communist party in the pre-Gorbachev USSR; an entrenched, conservative, militaristic, unashamedly corrupt, secretive, belligerently nationalistic bureaucracy. It gave the country twelve years of stagnation, spiritless boredom, and cynical greed.

Meanwhile, the all-star huckster of freedom and decentralization, Mikhail Gorbachev, in five remarkable years persuaded an entire subcontinent to “drop out” of Stalinism.

In this climate it is obvious that the party apparatus with the biggest budget for television advertising and the marketing ability to focus on the most telegenic, shallow, flamboyantly lurid issues (abortion, drugs, pledge of allegiance, school prayer, no taxes, and jingoistic, bellicose nationalism) would sweep to a landslide win on the votes of the 25 percent majority.

It is ironic that in the oldest democracy, the U.S., partisan politics seems to have lost its touch with reality. In the elections of the 1980s, millions were expended on political advertising. Elections were won by paid-time commercials involving moralistic images, emotional theatrics, and malicious fabrications. Old-fashioned religious dremonology and fake patriotism, skillfully splashed across the television screens, replaced rational discussion of issues.

Gorbachev was dismayed to find that many Soviet youth, given freedom of the press, were more interested in UFOs, punk rock, astrology, and hashish than in political issues.


THE END OF MAJORITARIAN DEMOCRACY

In the feudal and industrial ages, majoritarian democracy was usually a powerful libertarian counterculture force defending the individual against regal tyranny and class slavery. In the early years of the electronic-information stage (1950-1990), the ability of the religious-industrial-military rulers to manipulate television converted town-hall democracy into majoritarian, prime-time, sit-com totalitarianism.

Cybernetic media in the hands of politicians with shockingly large advertising budgets plays to the dread LCD (lowest common denominator). The new fragile democracies in eastern Europe will probably have to pass through this phase of marketeer, televoid elections manipulated by “spin doctors” and dishonest advertising.

So much for the down side. The good news is that cybernetic media cannot be controlled. Electronic signals flashing around the atmosphere cannot be kept out by stone walls or border police dogs. Japanese tape-decks, ghetto-blasters, digital appliances in the hands of the individual empowers the HCD (highest common denominator).

THE SOCIOLOGY OF QUANTUM PHYSICS

The philosophy that predicted this movement is not capitalism or socialism. It is not industrial democracy (the tyranny of the 25 percent majority). Psychedelic concepts like glasnost and perestroika are based on the common-sense principles of quantum physics—relativity, flexibility, singularity.

Werner Heisenberg’s equations described the fabrication of singular, personal realities based on free, open communication. Objective indeterminacy, that bane of the mechanical mind, means individual determinism and self-reliance—the mottoes of the new breed.

DR. SPOCK PERSONALIZES QUANTUM PSYCHOLOGY

In 1946, quantum physics was translated into common- sense, hands-on psychology by a pediatrician. The youth movement was generated by a genial child psychologist who taught two generations of postwar parents to feed their children on demand. “Treat your kids as individuals, as singularities.” Here was the most radical, subversive social doctrine ever proposed, and it was directed to the only groups that can bring about enduring change: parents, pediatricians, teachers.

This postwar generation of indulged, “self-centered” individuals started to appear exactly when the new psychedelic-cybernetic brain-change technologies became available to individuals.

MARSHALL McLUHAN EMPOWERS QUANTUM PSYCHOLOGY

The baby-boomers were the first television species, the first human beings who used electronic digital appliances to turn on and tune in realities; the first to use neurotransmitting chemicals to change their own brains; the first members of this “global village” made possible by television.

Image

The postpolitical information society, which we are now developing does not operate on the basis of obedience and conformity to dogma. It is based on individual thinking, scientific know-how, quick exchange of facts around feedback networks, high-tech ingenuity, and practical, front-line creativity. The society of the future no longer grudgingly tolerates a few open-minded innovators. The cybernetic society is totally dependent on a large pool of such people, communicating at light speed with each other across state lines and national boundaries.


The fall of the Berlin Wall was accomplished by youth seeking individual freedom. This student counterculture started in America in the 1960s, and it was spread via electronic media.

“Hongk is all the rage in the Mongolian People’s Republic. It’s a key part of the Shineshiel (perestroika) that has been sweeping the remote communist nation for weeks now... Hongk is the name of the rock ’n’ roll band that has been playing its powerful, dissident songs to packed audiences in the state-owned auditoriums of Mongolia’s capitol of Ulan Bator for months now. Its music has become the unchallenged anthem of the city’s fledgling protest movement” (Los Angeles Times, 1/24/90).

THE FUNCTION OF POSTDEMOCRATIC GOVERNMENT

The primary function of a free society in the postdemocratic age is the protection of individual freedom from politicians who attempt to limit personal freedom.

Image

This individual-freedom movement is new to human history, because it is not based on geography, politics, class, or religion. It has to do with changes, not in the power structure, not in who controls the police, but in the individual’s mind. It is a “head” revolution: a consciousness-raising affair. It involves “thinking for yourself.” This cultural meme involves intelligence, personal access to information, an anti-ideological reliance on common sense, mental proficiency, consciousness raising, street smarts, intelligent consumerism-hedonism, personal-communication skills. The meme-idea is not new. Countercultures go back at least as far as Hermes Trismegistus, and include Socrates, Paracelsus, the Renaissance, Voltaire, Emerson, Thoreau, Dada, Gurdjieff, and Crowley.

But the rapid spread of this mutational meme from 1960 to 1990 was due to the sudden, mass availability of neurochemical and electronic technology. Demand feeding. Chemicals and screens spraying electronic information into eyedrums and earballs, activating brains. Suddenly, youth all over the world are wearing jeans and listening to John Lennon’s “Give Peace a Chance.” The individuality meme that swept American youth during the 1960s has infected the world.

In the 1970s, the Spock-McLuhan epidemic spread around western Europe. The signs of this awakening are always the same. Young minds exposed to the free spray of electronic information suddenly blossom like flowers in the spring. The June 1989 demonstrations in Tien An Men square were a classic replay of Chicago 1968 and Kent State 1970.

Power, Mao said, comes from the barrel of a gun. That may have been true in the industrial past, but in cybernetic 1990, the very notion of political “power” seems anachronistic, kinky, sick. For the new breed the notion of “political power” is hateful, evil, ghastly. The idea that any group should want to grab domination, control, authority, supremacy, or jurisdiction over others is a primitive perversity—as loathsome and outdated as slavery or cannibalism.

It was not the Berlin Wall of concrete and guard houses that protected the “evil empire”; it was the electronic wall that was easily breached by MTV. McLuhan and Foucault have demonstrated that freedom depends upon who controls the technologies that reach your brain—telephones, the editing facility, the neurochemicals, the screen.

MASS INDIVIDUALISM IS NEW

This sudden emergence of humanism and open-mindedness on a mass scale is new.

In tribal societies the role of the individual is to be a submissive, obedient child. The tribal elders do the thinking. Survival pressures do not afford them the luxury of freedom.

In feudal societies the individual is a serf or vassal, peasant, chattel, peon, slave. The nobles and priests do the thinking. They are trained by tradition to abhor and anathematize open-mindedness and thinking for yourself.

After the tribal (familial) and feudal (childlike) stages of human evolution came the industrial (insectoid) society, where the individual is a worker or manager; in later stages, a worker-consumer.

In all these static, primitive societies, the thinking is done by the organizations who control the guns. The power of open-minded individuals to make and remake decisions about their own lives, to fabricate, concoct, invent, prevaricate their own lies is severely limited. Youth had no power, no voice, no choice.

The postpolitical information society, which we are now developing, does not operate on the basis of obedience and conformity to dogma. It is based on individual thinking, scientific know-how, quick exchange of facts around feedback networks, high-tech ingenuity, and practical, front-line creativity. The society of the future no longer grudgingly tolerates a few open-minded innovators. The cybernetic society is totally dependent on a large pool of such people, communicating at light speed with each other across state lines and national boundaries. Electrified thoughts invite fast feedback, creating new global societies that require a higher level of electronic know-how, psychological sophistication, and open-minded intelligence.

This cybercommunication process is accelerating so rapidly that to compete on the world information market of the 21st Century, nations, companies, even families must be composed of change-oriented, innovative individuals who are adepts in communicating via the new cyberelectronic technologies.

The new breeds are simply much smarter than the old guard. They inhale new information the way they breathe oxygen. They stimulate each other to continually upgrade and reformat their minds. People who use cybertechnology to make fast decisions on their jobs are not going to go home and passively let aging, closed-minded white, male politicians make decisions about their lives.

The emergence of this new open-minded caste in different countries around the world is the central historical issue of the last forty years.

THE REVOLUTIONS OF 1989 BEGAN WITH THE BEATS

Image

In the 1950s in America, at the height of the television Cold War, there appeared a group of free people who created highly communicable counterculture memes that were to change history. The beats stood for the ecstatic vision and for individual freedom in revolt against all bureaucratic, closed-minded systems. They saw themselves as citizens of the world. They met with Russian poets to denounce the Cold War. They practiced oriental yoga. They experimented, as artists have for centuries, with mind-opening foods and drugs and sexual practices.

Most important, with their minds turning like satellite dishes to other cultures, they had an historical sense of what they were doing. They saw themselves as heirs to the long tradition of intellectual and artistic individualism that goes beyond national boundaries.

What made the beats more effective than any dissident-artist group in human history was the timing. Electronic technology made it possible for their bohemian memes, their images, and their sounds to be broadcast at almost the speed of light around the world. Just as soap companies were using television and radio to market their products, so the beats used the electronic media to advertise their ideas. The hippie culture of the 1960s and the current liberation movements in Eastern Europe are indebted to the libertarian dissenting of the ’fifties counterculture.

BRINGING THE 1960s TO CHINA

The original Be-In (San Francisco, January 1967) produced an ocean of youth who gathered to celebrate their be-ings and their solidarity. It turned out to be the dawning of the psychedelic-cybernetic age (or glasnost, as it is now called). This first San Francisco Be-In was not organized. The word got out via the underground press, progressive radio stations, word of mouth. Three months later the First (and only) International Monterey Pop festival harnessed the flourishing psychedelic spirit to electrically amplified music.

The symbol of the counterculture was the widely repeated image of a young man putting a flower in the gun barrel of the National Guardsman who was threatening him. The students in Tien An Men Square in June 1989 remembered. Their stated purpose was to bring the 1960s to China. The epidemic of freedom- memes in China caught the authorities totally off guard—just like the numbers at the Woodstock festival.  

The beats stood for the ecstatic vision and for individual freedom in revolt against all bureaucratic, closed-minded systems. They saw themselves as citizens of the world. They met with Russian poets to denounce the Cold War. They practiced oriental yoga. They experimented, as artists have for centuries, with mind-opening foods and drugs and sexual practices.

Most important, with their minds turning like satellite dishes to other cultures, they had an historical sense of what they were doing. They saw themselves as heirs to the long tradition of intellectual and artistic individualism that goes beyond national boundaries.


Image
PETER BOOTH LEE

The social and political implications of this democratization of the screen are enormous. In the past, friendship and intimate exchange have been limited to local geography or occasional visits. Now you can play electronic tennis with a pro in Tokyo, interact with a classroom in Paris, cyberflirt with cute guys in any four cities of your choice. A global fast-feedback language of icons and memes, facilitated by instant translation devices, will smoothly eliminate the barriers of language that have been responsible for most of the war and conflict of the last centuries.


SELF-GOVERNMENT ENDS REPRESENTATIVE GOVERNMENT

Partisan politics is over. In the postpolitical age, people are catching on to the bottom-line fact: The only function of a political party is to keep itself in office.

This free-speech/free-thought movement emerges routinely when enough young people have access to electronic technology. When the rulers of China made telephones and television sets available to millions of people, the swarming of activated youth in Tien An Men Square was guaranteed. Many of the Chinese students had seen television coverage of student demonstrations in other countries. When East German television stations began transmitting programs from the West, the Berlin Wall was on its way down. In each nation, the free-thought movement of the 1980s was produced by students and intellectuals who learned how to use electronic appliances and digital computers to think for themselves, fabricate their personal mythologies, and communicate their irreverent aspirations.

THE POLITICS OF PRO-CHOICE: THE RIGHT TO CHOOSE YOUR COLLEGE MAJOR

Freedom is an individual thing. It means something singular, unique, personal for each and every person. The Chinese students want something that is not mentioned by Marx or Margaret Thatcher. They want to say what’s on their minds. The right to make their own career decisions. The right to choose their college major. The right to be silly and have fun. The right to kiss your boyfriend in public. The right to mug in front of a television camera. The right to flaunt their own personal lies, concoctions, invented truths in competition with the old official lies.

Gorbachev was dismayed to find that many Soviet youth, given freedom of the press, were more interested in UFOs, punk rock, astrology, and hashish than in political issues.

BLUE JEANS, RUNNING SHOES, AND DESIGNER MEMES

Image

Most young people in the liberated lands want to depoliticize, demilitarize, decentralize, secularize, and globalize.

The new breed is jumping the gene pools, forming postindustrial, global meme-pools. They are the informates. From their earliest years, most of their defining memes have come flashing at light speed across borders in digital-electronic form, light signals received by screens and radios and record players. Their habitat is the electron-sphere, the environment of digital signals that is called the info-world. The global village.

They are the first generation of our species to discover and explore Cyberia. They are migrating not to a new place, but to a wide-open new time. The new breed will fashion, conceive, and design the realities they inhabit

THE DESIGNER SOCIETIES OF THE 21ST CENTURY

Who controls the screen controls the mind of the screen watcher. The power-control struggles of the 1990s will occur on screens in the living rooms of individuals.

In nations where religious or partisan political groups control the screens to fabricate paranoias, the people will be incited to fear, anger, and moral outrage. In the last ten years, the Islamic states and the U.S. under Reagan-Bush have effectively made this point.

The manufacture and distribution of inexpensive communications appliances and software will be of enormous importance. Just as the USSR and the U.S. controlled the world for forty years by distributing weapons to every compliant dictatorship, now Japanese and Silicon Valley companies are liberating the world with an endless flood of electronic devices designed for individuals.

Inexpensive appliances will allow individuals to write on their screens the way Gutenberg hardware-software allowed individuals to write on pages five hundred years ago. These inexpensive digitizing and editing devices are already transforming the home into a cyberstudio in which individuals will design, edit, perform, and transmit memes on their screens.

Individuals clothed in cyberwear will be able to meet each other in virtual realities built for two. The world becomes a neighbourhood in which a person eight thousand miles away can be “right there in your windowpane.”

The social and political implications of this democratization of the screen are enormous. In the past, friendship and intimate exchange have been limited to local geography or occasional visits. Now you can play electronic tennis with a pro in Tokyo, interact with a classroom in Paris, cyberflirt with cute guys in any four cities of your choice. A global fast-feedback language of icons and memes, facilitated by instant translation devices, will smoothly eliminate the barriers of language that have been responsible for most of the war and conflict of the last centuries.

Who controls the screen controls the mind of the screen watcher. The power-control struggles of the 1990s will occur on screens in the living rooms of individuals... The manufacture and distribution of inexpensive communications appliances and software will be of enormous importance. Just as the USSR and the U.S. controlled the world for forty years by distributing weapons to every compliant dictatorship, now Japanese and Silicon Valley companies are liberating the world with an endless flood of electronic devices designed for individuals.


III.5. Electronic Cultures

Image

Let the word go out to friend and foe alike, that we are passing the torch to a new generation.

-- J.F.K., Inaugural Speech, 1960


This impassioned rhetoric was the first time that the leader of a superpower or empire had ever used the powerful meme: “generation” J.F.K. was a memetic agent, literally creating a new breed!

Did the speech writers who in 1960 passed along to Jack Kennedy that famous “torch” quote intuit what was going to happen? Did they foresee that the next two decades would produce, for the first time in human history, an economic, political power base called “the youth culture”?

The neurological situation is this: The language circuits of the brain are imprinted between ages three and eight. The media used in the home will format the brain of these children... If the parents do not read and if there are no newspapers, magazines, or books in the house, the kids are at a tremendous disadvantage when they timidly walk (or swagger) into the scary, impersonal first-grade classroom.


In the 1950s, this new baby-boom generation was tuning in the dials of a new electronic-reality appliance called television to Leave It to Beaver and American Bandstand. And they were being lovingly guarded in maximum-security homes by devoted parents who had dutifully memorized Dr. Benjamin Spock’s Common-Sense Guide to Child Care.

The basic theme of Spock’s manual (we parents actually called it the Bible) is: Treat your children as individuals.

This innocent bombshell exploded at a pregnant moment of postwar national prosperity and global self-confidence. The Marshall Plan was pouring billions into the rehabilitation-recovery of former enemies. Instead of looting, raping, and occupying the defeated enemies, we treated them like errant offspring who had become delinquent gang members. We helped them get on their feet again and gain self-respect We postwar Spock parents became the first generation to honour and respect our children and to support their independence from us.

The importance of this event is hard to overestimate. The baby-boomers became the first generation of electronic consumers. Before they were ten, their brains were processing more “realities per day” than their grandparents had confronted in a year.

THE IMPORTANCE OF PARENTAL HOME MEDIA  

In 1950, the humble black-and-white television set marked the birth of the electronic culture. Suddenly, humans had developed electronic technology and the know-how to operate the brain and reprogram the mind.

The neurological situation is this: The language circuits of the brain are imprinted between ages three and eight The media used in the home will format the brain of these children. Linguist-psychologists (Noam Chomsky, Piaget) have demonstrated that languages are imprinted during this brief window of imprint vulnerability. This means that the home media used by the family formats the thought-processing files (left-brain mind) of the children. Mind-change (reformatting) could occur only under conditions that duplicate “the home culture.”

If the parents do not read and if there are no newspapers, magazines, or books in the house, the kids are at a tremendous disadvantage when they timidly walk (or swagger) into the scary, impersonal first-grade classroom. (Most good teachers understand this principle, and convert the schoolroom into a homey, supportive environment.)

We also sense the implications for reformatting mind-files (formerly known as remedial reading). Cultures or individuals who wish to change must use different language media. For the illiterate, delinquent gang member, we offer a maximum-security, homelike environment jammed with media coaches. Malcolm X, for example, was taught to read by a stem, loving parent figure in a Massachusetts prison.

And the rest you oughta know!

THE STAGES OF HUMANIZATION

As I flash back on my seventy-plus years of service as Self-Appointed Change Agent and Evolutionary Scout, this viewpoint comes into focus. Our species has, in seven decades, surfed bigger, faster, more complex waves of brain change than our species experienced during the last 25,000 years.

Number of (tribal) generations from cave-wall painting to hand-writing and large-scale, public Egyptian art (3200 B.C.)?

• About 1,500.

Number of (feudal) generations from the pyramids to Notre Dame Cathedral, oil painting, and book literacy?

• About 320.

Number of generations from first factory-printed book (the first home media) to the radios, telephones, record players, movies of A.D. 1950?

• About 23.

Number of generations from passive, black-and-white television (1950) to multichannel, multimedia, interactive digital home-screen design?

• 3.

Image
ANDY FRITH

THE GENERATIONAL THING

Each generation since 1950 is the equivalent of an age or an epic or an era in past history. Each succeeding generation has accessed more-powerful electronic-language tools. For the first time, we can understand the mechanics of evolution—the language and technology. Finally, the evolution of human brain power is reaching the optimum mutation rate. Electronic brain tools change so rapidly that every fifteen to twenty years the new generation creates a new breed.

Each stage of human culture defines memetic evolution in terms of its media, its language. And the media and languages of cultures determine whether they actively evolve or if they remain passive and unchanging.

Static cultures have built-in, iron-clad linguistic protections against change. Their media-languages self-replicate via repetition, rote-learning, etc. Their reproductive media-languages glorify death as the step to eternal life in well-advertised, perfectly run retirement communities called Heaven, etc. Their media-languages prevent them from being exposed to, infected by, or fertilized by other languages.

Our species has, in seven decades, surfed bigger, faster, more complex waves of brain change than our species experienced during the last 25,000 years.

Image


To illustrate the importance of language in cultural solidarity, we cite the case of the Iranian Shi’ite ayatollahs who put a $5 million price “on the head” of author Salman Rushdie for a few taboo words in a novel published in far-away England. Or the case of militant Christians who try to force tax-supported schools to teach biblical creationism.

Cultures evolve only when their media-languages have built-in programs:

1. To discourage rote self-replication;

2. To stimulate self-change via shock-humour, irreverent counterculture, chaotics, etc.;

3. To invite fusion with other cultures, and fusion with other media-languages.

Feudal languages gave no words or graphics that encouraged, tolerated, or even mentioned the notion of evolution during earthly life. The almighty male God creates and controls. Heaven is the destination. Chaos, complexity, change are daemonized, tabooed.

The tech-mech engineers of the industrial age (1500-1950) published texts, manuals, and handbooks defining evolution in terms of a Newtonian-Darwinian-Gordon Liddy competitive power struggle: survival of the most brutal, and by the book.

THE INFORMATION AGE (1950-2010)

In the information age, evolution is defined in terms of brain power.

• The ability to operate the brain: activate, boot up, turn on, access neurochannels.

• The ability to reformat and re-edit mind-files.

• The ability to receive, process, send messages at tight speed.

• The ability to communicate in the multimedia mode; to invent audiographic dictionaries and audiographic grammars.

By 1995 the mainstream home-media array of inexpensive multimedia appliances will have combined the computer, television, video-cassette recorder, fax, compact-disc player, telephone, etc., into one personal home-digital system. During the feudal culture, brain power changed little from century to century. In the mechanical culture, media machines like telephone and radio reached Main Street homes a few decades after their invention. But the explosion of brain power in the electronic culture from 1950-1995 requires precise birthdates for each generation.
admin
Site Admin
 
Posts: 36135
Joined: Thu Aug 01, 2013 5:21 am

Re: Chaos & Cyberculture, by Timothy Leary, Ph.D.

Postby admin » Thu Jun 13, 2019 3:59 am

Part 4 of 4

THE FOUR ELECTRONIC (LIGHT) CULTURES AND COUNTERCULTURES

As brain power accelerates exponentially, we can locate with precision the birth-dates of the post-mech cultures.

Americans who were ages three to eight around 1950 became the first primitive electronic culture. As kids, they sat in front of the television and learned how to turn on, tune in, and turn off. Let us call them the “Ike-Knows-Best-Leave-It-to-Beavers,” whose parents were sometimes known by the term “conformist.”

They were happy. But they were not hip. Their bland passivity instigated the perfect antidote—the counterculture, which initially appears during the sociosexual imprint window known as adolescence.

The Beats! Hipsters! Rebels! They smoked weed and scored junk. They despised television. They were shockingly literate. They wrote breakthrough poetry and poetic prose, honored jazz by ultra-hip African-Americans. They were sexually experimental.

Evolution of Countercultures

BEATS (1950-1965)


Mood: Cool, laid back.
Aesthetic-Erotics: Artistic, literate, hip. Interested in poetry, drugs, jazz. Attitude: Sarcastic, cynical. Brain-Tech: Low-tech, but early psychedelic explorers.
Intellectual Viewpoint: Well-informed, skeptical, street-smart.
Humanist Quotient: Tolerant of race and gay rights, but often male chauvinist. Politics: Bohemian, anti-Establishment.
Cosmic View: Romantic pessimism, Buddhist cosmology.

HIPPIES (1965-1975)

Mood: Blissed out.  
Aesthetic-Erotics: Earthy, horny, free-love oriented. Pot, LSD, acid rock.
Attitude: Peaceful, idealistic.
Brain-Tech: Psychedelic, but anti-high-tech.
Intellectual Viewpoint: Know-it-all, anti-intellectual.
Humanist Quotient: Male chauvinist, sometimes sexist, but socially tolerant and global village visionary.  
Politics: Classless, irreverent, passivist, but occasionally activist.
Cosmic View: Acceptance of chaotic nature of universe, but via Hindu passivity. Unscientific, occult minded, intuitive.

CYBERPUNKS (1975-1990)

Mood: Gloomy. Hip, but downbeat.  
Aesthetic-Erotics: Leather and grunge, tattoos, piercings. Hard drugs, psychedelics, smart drugs. Various forms of rock from metal to rap.
Attitude: Angry, cynical, feel undervalued by elders.
Brain-Tech: High-tech electronic.
Intellectual Viewpoint: Informed, open-minded, irreverent. Inundated with electronic signals.
Humanist Quotient: Non-sexist, ecological, global minded.
Politics: Alienated, skeptical.
Cosmic View: Pessimistic, but closet hope fiends.

NEW BREED (1990-2005)

Mood: Alert, cheerful.
Aesthetic-Erotics: Invention of personal style. Eclectic. Prefer techno and ambient music.
Attitude: Self-confident.
Brain-Tech: Psychedelic, super high-tech. Smart drugs, brain machines, Internet.
Intellectual Viewpoint: Informed, open-minded, irreverent.
Humanist Quotient: Tolerant, non-sexist, ecological, global.
Politics: Detached, individualistic. Zen opportunists.
Cosmic View: Acceptance of complexity, willingness to be a "chaos designer."


The 21st Century will witness a new global culture, peopled by new breeds who honour human individuality, human complexity, and human potential, enlightened immortals who communicate at light speed and design the technologies for their scientific re-animation.


Image

It is useful to see that the beats were older than the Beavers. In the 1940s, when the beats were three to eight years old, their home media were radio, films, records, books. The baby-boomers (76 million strong) were the television-watching Beavers of the 1950s and evolved into the hippies of the 1960s. Affluent, self-confident, spoiled consumers, ready to use their television-radio skills to be imprinted by turning on Bob Dylan, tuning in the Beatles, turning off parent songs, and fine-tuning colour screens.

The Nintendo generation of the 1980s became a pioneer group of cybernauts. They were the first humans to zap through the Alice Window and change electronic patterns on the other side of the screen. They will operate in cyberspace, the electronic environment of the 21st Century.

MILLENNIUM MADNESS (CHAOS COMING)

The next uncontrollable fifteen years (1995-2010) will accelerate this dizzy explosion of brain power. The fragmenting remnants of the old centralized social systems of the feudal and industrial civilizations are crumbling down.

The 21st Century will witness a new global culture, peopled by new breeds who honour human individuality, human complexity, and human potential, enlightened immortals who communicate at light speed and design the technologies for their scientific re-animation.

III.6. The Next Twenty Years

If one is asked to predict the next stage of human evolution, practical common sense suggests selecting the identifying survival characteristic of our species. What are our survival assets?

The instant glib answer would be that our species is defined by our enormous brains. Our survival asset is not hive intelligence, as in the social insects, but individual intelligence. Our species is classified as Homo sapiens sapiens. Victorian scholars apparently decided that we are the creatures who "think about thinking." Our growth as a species centers on our ability to think and communicate. Predictions about our future would focus on improvements in the way we think.

Our young, rookie species has recently passed through several stages of intelligence:

1. Tribal: For at least 22,000 years (approximately 25,000 to 3000 B.C.) the technologies for sapient thinking-communicating were those of a five-year-old child: bodily, i.e., oral-gestural.

2. Feudal: During an exciting period of approximately 3,350 years (3000 B.C. to A.D. 350) humans living north of the 35th-parallel latitude developed organized feudal-agricultural societies. The technologies for thinking-communicating were hand-tooled statues, temples, monuments. Their philosophy was enforced by emperors, caliphs, and kings.

3. It took approximately 1,250 years (A.D. 350 to 1600) to coopt the feudal kings and to establish the mechanical assembly-line managerial society. In this age, the technologies of thought-communication were mechanical printing presses, typewriters, telephones, produced by efficient workers in highly organized factories, run by centralized bureaucracies.

By now, in 1988, most people in the industrial sectors are extremely dependent on digital thoughts and light images presented on screens. The average American household watches television 7.4 hours a day. Almost all business transactions are run by software programs communicated on screens. Without conscious choice or fanfare we have migrated from the "real worlds" of voice, hand, machine into the digitized info-worlds variously called hyperspace, cyberspace, or digital physics.

This migration across the screen into the digital info-world marks the first phase of the postindustrial society.

By 2008 most humans living in postindustrial habitats will be spending as much time "jacked in" to info-worlds on the other side of the screen as they spend in the material worlds. In twenty years we will spend seven hours a day actively navigating, exploring, colonizing, exploiting the oceans and continents of digital data. Interscreening—creating mutual digital-realities—will be the most popular and growthful form of human communication.

Interscreening does not imply a derogation or neglect of flesh interactions.

Psybernetic

(management of the right brain). Mapping and colonizing the next frontier-one's own brain. Constructing info-environments in one’s own neuroworld, linking one’s neurospace to others. Marketing, leasing sharing one's brain power with others. Protecting one's brain from invasion and exploitation from without.


Image
ANDY FRITH

Our genetic assignment is the receiving processing and producing of digital information.


Image

Intimacy at the digital level programs and enriches exchanges in the warm levels. You do not lessen the richness of your murmur-touch-contact with your lover because you can also communicate by phone, fax, and hand-scrawled notes. Warm-breath interactions with your touch-friends will be more elegant and pleasant with the digital-reality option added.

Future global business will take two directions:

• Cybernetic (management of the left brain). Mapping and colonizing the digital data-worlds located on the other side of screens. Interpersonal computing. Interscreening with others. Building communal info-structures. Protecting cyberspaces from invasion and exploitation by others.

• Psybernetic (management of the right brain). Mapping and colonizing the next frontier—one's own brain. Constructing info-environments in one's own neuroworld. Linking one's neurospace to others. Marketing, leasing, sharing one's brain power with others. Protecting one's brain from invasion and exploitation from without.

Digital business will be run by multinational corporations based in Japan and Switzerland. The "multinates" will use individual brains as tools. Just as slaves, serfs, and prostitutes were forced to lease their bodies during the three predigital stages, people in 2008 will be leasing their brains. Work will hardly exist. Most physical tasks will be performed by automated machines. Body work will be considered a primitive form of slavery. No human will be forced by economic-political pressure to perform muscular-mechanical tasks that can be done better by robots.

In the 21st Century, the old Judaeo-Christian-Moslem sects will still be around, but they will have little power beyond entertainment and amusement. The future global religion will be intelligence increase. Upgrading rpms. The two main functions of a human being are consumption and production of thought. Our genetic assignment is the receiving, processing, and producing of digital information.

Image

Themes Which Define Cultures

THEME: EMOTIONAL ATTITUDE

CULTURE:


Based on Fear: Slow-steady or Impulsive; Serious-solemnworker; Arrogant or self-effacing; Tough-dangerous or meek-submissive

COUNTERCULTURE:

Based on Scientific Optimism: Animated-radiant; Happy; playful; Self-confident; candid; Friendly-sympathetic

THEME: MENTAL SKILLS  

CULTURE:


Mind Programmed by Obedience; By the book; Conservative thinker; Pious, reverent to organized religion; Loyal, unquestioning patriot

COUNTERCULTURE:

Mind Programmed by Self; Curious-open-minded; Creative-original; Cheerfully irreverent to organized religion; Irreverent to organized politics

THEME: NEUROLOGICAL REALITY  

CULTURE:
Passive Reality Consumer; Conforms to culture's life style; Conventionally moral & immoral; Avoids brain change; accepts cultural imprints; Passive electronic consumer

COUNTERCULTURE:

Electronic Reality Skills; Invents personal style; Sensual-sensitive; Operates own brain: psychedelic; Electronic communication skills: cybernetic

THEME: PHILOSOPHICAL APPROACH  

CULTURE


Sin-Driven: Deeply identified with own race, sex, age & nation; Believes nature should be dominated; Pessimistic about evolution; Order-control person

COUNTERCULTURE:

Pluralistic Viewpoint: Humanist: respects all differences; Ecological: earth conscious; Optimistic about evolution; Chaos designer


Image

III.7. The Godparent: Conversation with Winona Ryder

In the old days there was less menu choice of one’s life’s decisions. Marriages were arranged by family and church to make sure that offspring would remain within the flock. Selection of one’s religion was also prearranged. Soon after birth the newborn infant was rushed to church for baptism and enrollment in the familiar creed.

In our secular society the tradition of the godparent seemed to be fading away like the myth of Santa Claus or the Tooth Fairy or the Virgin Mother. Indeed, in the age of Coppola, the term godfather had taken on a sinister flavour. What reasonably good-natured adult would want to play the role of the dread Don Corleone in the overheated family drama?

These were my thoughts on the subject until a few years ago, when Winona Ryder made me an offer I couldn’t refuse: She chose me to serve as her godfather.

So I am here to cheer this institution of godparent-godchild—when it is arranged by freely consenting people who have reached the age of reason.

It is the duty of parents and guardians to rush around acting like family therapist, FBI agent, Mother Teresa, Tommy Lasorda, and the neighbourhood savings-and-loan office. The duty of the teenager is precisely spelled out: to do everything conceivable to drive parents and guardians up the wall.

The godfather, however, has a role that is simple and simply divine: to be a friend and admiring student. The duty of the goddaughter is more complicated. It is her pleasure to entertain the godfather and to educate him diligently about current events, new developments, hot happenings, and thus prepare him to deal with the mysterious future. I now feel sorry for any adult who does not have a supportive, caring godchild to act as guide and role model.

Winona’s parents, Michael and Cindy Horowitz, started the world’s largest collection of books and materials about the use of psychoactive plants, foods, and drugs. Michael and I have worked together very closely for almost twenty years—he was my archivist and published a three-hundred-page bibliography of my writings. He came to visit me in 1972, while l was in exile in Switzerland. He had with him a photograph of Winona taken when she was about a week old; so I wrote an inscription on the picture welcoming a new Buddha to planet Earth.

The first time I met her she was perhaps seven years old. I visited her family’s commune-estate in Mendocino county. We walked hand in hand, and Winona said that she had wanted to meet me because she had heard that I was a mad scientist. I thought that was a pretty good description; I marked her as a comer right there. We’ve seen each other regularly since then. We used to go to Dodger games together—she and her father are great fans.

Winona has so many talents that I hope to emulate. She is modest, changeable, solid, witty-wise, thoughtful, and full-tilt here and now: exuberant, intense, bouncy, passionate. Winona does her homework and comes fully prepared.

And so she arrived at my home for this interview. She helped me activate and test the tape recorder, and we began a typical godfather-goddaughter conversation.


TIMOTHY LEARY: You know, this is the twentieth anniversary of Interview, which of course started before you were born. This is the year of other anniversaries, too. We had the Chicago trials twenty years ago, and the Vietnam anti-war mobilization, the Weathermen—

WINONA RYDER: Woodstock.

TL: Woodstock—almost to the day. What do you make of it all?

WR: Well, it’s weird... you know how I grew up. Even though I grew up in the 1970s and the 1980s, I could almost say that I grew up in the 1960s, because our house was like a library-museum of books and paraphernalia from the 1960s. All my life my dad has talked about that time, and I think he’s still living in the 1960s in a way.

TL: Not to mention the cast of characters that came to visit your house.

WR: Yeah.

TL: Allen Ginsberg.

WR: Yeah, you! [laughs]

TL: And of course I was there as much as I could be.

WR: All the ’sixties and ’seventies fashion is interesting. You walk down Melrose Avenue now and you see platform shoes and all the psychedelic colours.

TL: Tie-dyes.

WR: Tie-dyes and all that. How does it feel to have your past become this trend now? The other day I was driving and I saw this group of girls who looked like they were right out of the 1960s. I started thinking: Here are these teenagers who are trying to be nostalgic about a generation they were never a part of.

TL Well, it’s the duty, the genetic responsibility, of every 16-year-old kid to do everything possible to drive their parents crazy. My stepson Zachary has done the one thing that could offend his mother, who loves him dearly, and that is, he’s become a ’sixties freak [laughs]. He’s a Deadhead, and he’s letting his hair grow. And he’s not looking fashionable. Bill Walton, the basketball player who was a hippie activist, is a longtime friend of mine, and he has taken Zach and me to Grateful Dead concerts. There’s a feeling of communion there that you could cut with a knife. It’s the revival of the ancient pagan festival: people getting together to have possession and trance experiences, and to share that communion.

I have been not surprised but offended by the way the media have trivialized Woodstock. All the interviews have been about the promoters. Who cares that the promoters lost money? There was an emphasis on the mud and the lack of housing. What interested me was that exactly the week of the twentieth anniversary of Woodstock, there was a rock concert in Moscow that over a hundred thousand Russian kids came to—with Ozzy Osbourne, of all people [laughs]. And they were wearing jeans and headbands, and talking about peace and love. In America you’re not allowed to mention the fact that Woodstock was a kid caper. It was happening again that very weekend in Russia. It happened in May in China. You had a million kids. That was a Be-In. Nobody called it a Be-In. The connection between Woodstock and our ’sixties movement and the Chinese and the Soviets is never mentioned, because that would imply that the same thing is happening there that happened here.

One of my memories of you dates from the time that you were on the commune in Mendocino. Barbara—from the first time she met you—has raved about your style. And Barbara is, as you know, an obsessive perfectionist about such things. I was always amused by the fact that you used to send us letters and little style drawings and pictures every few weeks. And they were very avant-garde. Maybe they were punk—they certainly were not braids and beads and barefoot stuff. Up on the commune you were probing, which I thought was charming. Do you remember that?

WR: Yeah. Very well [laughs]. I think that was all due to the fact that ever since I can remember I’ve been so obsessed with movies. And my mom ran a little movie house up in Elk, where we lived for a while, and she would show old movies. That’s how I got introduced to the whole thing. It was like a warehouse. There were couches and beds, and people would pay fifty cents or a dollar to come in. And we’d all just sort of lie around and watch movies. That’s where I first saw A Face in the Crowd and East of Eden and all these great movies. I think it was that that made me want to go home and start designing clothes for Patricia Neal or Lauren Bacall. I had no idea that they were older, or that they were retired, or they were dead, or whatever. I really thought that they were walking around like that.

TL: Some of your interviewers have commented that you seem more like a ’thirties or 'forties movie person than a Brat Packer. They were talking about your style, or your approach. Over and over again they say, “She’s 16 going on 40,” or “She’s 17 going on 50” [laughs]. That’s a wide span and scope of input there.

WR: Yeah. It’s very flattering, but at the same time it’s a little frightening, I think.

TL: [with humour] It’s a hard job to live up to.

WR: Yeah! [laughs]

TL: You’ll have to take it day by day here. Another thing that intrigued me about your past, Noni, is that there was not much television. There was no electricity for a while, and there was actually no television on the ranch.

WR: No, none.

I think the great thing is that instead of watching TV we would make things up. We would use our imagination...
 

TL: Now, that is a blessed and singular advantage you have. You’re off to a fast start on a different track. Because most kids were watching television and didn’t really get involved in movies.

WR: Yeah. There was no TV. One person, who lived on the next piece of land, had a TV, but they only got one channel. And so sometimes, if we were lucky [TL laughs], if we wanted to we could see some fuzzy episode of, you know, Starsky and Hutch or whatever [laughs]. But it was never anything we really wanted to do. I think the great thing is that instead of watching TV we would make things up. We would use our imagination, and we would make up skits and perform them at the main house. Remember the main house?

TL: Sure do.

WR: Or we would make up different games and we would have contests. We would do stuff that exercised our mind much more than just sitting in front of a screen and staring at it What’s shocking, I think, about this day and age is how much television kids watch. I mean, I have friends back home who can’t miss a show. They just can’t do it I’ll go back to Petaluma and I think, “Oh, well, I’m here for a couple of days; I’ll get to spend some time with my friends.” And some people I know would actually love to see me, but they can’t miss part two of Family Ties, or whatever they watch. I’m sure there’s a lot of good TV, but, you know, television is just TV, as far as I’m concerned.

TL: Going back to that commune scene of a small group of young people with intelligent, college-educated parents-it’s like a movie set. They’re on a spaceship, or they’re somehow isolated from the main currents of America, such as TV, so they begin making up their own minds. It’s almost like an episode of Star Trek Captain Kirk finds this Mendocino commu...  

WR: Yeah! [both laugh] What was also real neat about the land was that there were about three hundred acres. I forget how many people lived there, but every house had a name. We lived in “the Mansion.” Then there was “the A-Frame,” and then there was “the Cabin.” Every little house had a name, and every time something was built, we would name it. Everything—even a field—was named.

TL: It was personalized.

WR: Exactly. There were so many opportunities to use our imagination. People always assume that I got frustrated and bored up there. But I was really blessed, because it taught me how much there is in here [points to her head] to use.

TL: Also, you grew up with a lot of books. After all, your father and mother had published three or four books. I’ve never seen a person more obsessed with books than your father.

WR: [laughs] I know.

TL: When he goes to a new town, he immediately heads for the secondhand bookstores.

WR: And he doesn’t come back [laughs] for a long time! He literally moves in.

TL: Like “Daddy’s down at the saloon. Let’s get him home.”

WR: Yeah!

TL: You were exposed to more books than most kids your age. That was part of the sea that you swam through.

WR: Absolutely. My dad would give me books at a really early age because he was so impatient Some of the books I just was not old enough to understand. But he could never grasp that. So I’d end up having to read them once and then have to read them again about a year later and hope that I would get them. But both of my parents were so encouraging. I’ve been writing ever since I can remember. They really worked with me.

TL: Now, wait a minute. You started writing at an early age?

WR: Yeah. I have been writing ever since I can remember, be it my journal or short stories or whatever. I actually wrote a short novel when I was 12, which was about To Kill a Mockingbird . I read it when I was about 10. It was one of my favorite books. So I told the same story—about Tom Robinson, the black guy who was convicted and killed—from his little sister’s point of view. What really has influenced me with my writing is music. I wake up in the morning, and I put some tape or record on immediately, and that sort of determines how my day is going to be.

TL: You have to be pretty careful of that. It’s like planning your wardrobe. You’re planning your mood for the day. When was the first time that you ever heard of Andy Warhol?

WR: I first heard of him because I became fascinated with Edie Sedgwick when I was 11 or 12— I read that book about her.

TL: The one that George Plimpton and Jean Stein did. I knew Edie.

WR: Yeah. I read it driving with my dad to L.A. to visit you. It was about a nine-hour trip, and I remember I finished it just as we were pulling up your driveway.

TL: You’ve never been around New York that much.

WR: Well, I’ve been there a lot, but I basically went to Brooklyn to visit my grandparents. I wasn’t in the Manhattan scene too much.

TL: During the late 1960s, as you know, my family and my friends were living in Millbrook, about an hour and a half north of New York City, which was ideal. We could be out all day hiking and playing around and just being with nature. At five o’clock, we’d take a shower and jump in the car, and by seven we could be at a cocktail party in New York. And then at two o’clock we’d get in the car and be home by three. So we had the best of both worlds there at Millbrook. It also meant that on weekends many of the New York people would come up. The Mellon family had this big house there. The Grateful Dead would be there a lot. At the same time we’d have the top artists and fashion people too. So I knew Andy very well during those days, and I used to go by the Factory and the loft. I think Andy has had a great effect on American culture. Andy used to take a Coca-Cola bottle and say, [doing AW's voice] “Isn’t it wonderful? A peasant in Indochina can drink out of the same wonderful, shapely bottle that Liz Taylor can.” That’s Pop.

WR: Recently, you’ve been talking a lot about increasing your intelligence. How would you advise kids to become smarter? Navigate their own reality? Move things along? Is it possible to question authority and respect it at the same time?

TL: Well, my only advice and my only message is: Think for yourself and question authority. TFYQA. But “think for yourself” does not mean ‘think selfishly.” It means “think independently.” And questioning authority doesn’t mean simply rejecting authority. Maybe you question authority, and 80 percent of what authority says, you buy. Good! I don’t care what people think as long us they have thought for themselves. So if you end up a Republican, right wing, it’s okay with me, as long as you have done it having had a gourmet, a connoisseur’s selection of all the options. As long as you haven’t done it out of fear or laziness.

WR: Yeah. I would like to ask you about literary heroes. I know that Huckleberry Finn is one of your literary heroes, and Holden Caulfield is definitely mine. And I found them a little bit similar. I read Tom Sawyer and Huckleberry Finn long before I read Catcher in the Rye. But—

TL Did they affect you?

WR: A great deal. I think it’s safe to say that Holden changed my whole life as it did for so many young people. What was amazing about it was, I read it without knowing that it was a famous adolescent book, that everybody read it. I thought it was this sleeper or something. I didn’t know. I guess everyone felt that way.

TL: You discovered it, huh? [laughs]

WR: Yeah. After I read it, from then on it was me and Holden—we were like this team. And then I found out that everybody had read it. What I loved about Huckleberry Finn was... well, obviously, that he did what he wanted to do, and was a free-thinker. And I got a sense of that in Holden too. I think they would have probably been friends.

TL: They were both alienated in the best sense of the word. Holden was watching the craziness that was going on around him. I did that as a kid. And obviously Huck did that too.

WR: I think both Holden and Huck are the perfect role models. I guess I’m a little disappointed in the role models that kids are choosing now. You know, Axl Rose from Guns n’ Roses.

TL: He gives some pretty raw interviews, doesn’t he? Is he just being deliberately bad, or is he stupid?

WR: I think he’s stupid, actually.

TL: I hate to hear you say that, because he claims to be a fan of mine. You know what he said to me? He said, [doing Rose’s voice] “Man, I love yoah books, ’cause I just take yoah books and show ’em to girls, and I can get any girl I want.”

WR: What a compliment! [laughs] TL: Of course, it didn’t imply that he’d read them.

WR: Just that he had them there on the nightstand... In Rolling Stone, maybe a month ago, right after they did a story on me, somebody wrote in and said, “Winona Ryder is my role model.” I was really flattered. But then I got to thinking about it, and I started getting scared. I’m really going to have to watch what I do, watch what I say. I feel an instinctive responsibility.

TL: But your role is not to defend Christianity or the middle class. Your role is to be an independent, fresh, always-changing person. So they can never model themselves after anything you’ve said, because you’ve left it and gone.

WR: Yeah. [laughs]

TL: You’ve got to have that confidence, Noni. I’ve had that same problem. I’ve been in many great institutions where some of the leading figures come up and say, “Tim! You have always been my role model. Everything I have I owe to you ” And of course they’re prisoners at Folsom.

WR: Oh no! [laughs]

TL: Yeah. [laughs] But you can’t worry about that. People say to me that they want to be followers. I say, “You can’t follow me. I don’t know where I'm going, for one thing. And number two, I'm gone by the time you get there.”

WR: Kids today tend to think the ultimate thing is to be a movie star or a rock star. To be like Axl or like Madonna.

TL: Or an athlete... Well, there is a tremendous change happening in the world today, as we move from the industrial-factory society. In a factory society everybody wants to get to the top of that particular factory. You want to be the top movie star, or the top rock star, or the top banker. That’s the industrial age, which is a pyramid going up. In the information age it’s all changed. Singularity, individuality—everyone is going to be a movie star within two or three years. I'm going to have you come and look at this little film in a minute, and show you how, for less than a hundred dollars, a kid at Christmas in 1990 will have lens goggles, a little cap, an electronic glove, and a bodysuit so that they can put themselves—and they can be dancing, walking, jumping—on the other side of the screen. Everyone is going to be directing and acting in their own movies.

WR: Well, that’s wonderful! Because that’s playing off yourself. And dealing with yourself.

TL: Think of how the Hollywood system and the music system have become like a factory. They even call it the movie industry. And they talk about this software industry, when it’s not that at all. In the old days the studios would grind it out; it was like an assembly line for movies. And the stars were the commodities. But that’s all going to change. Everyone will be making their own movies. And there are going to be networks set up so that every kid can be Marilyn Monroe, or can actually be like Jack Nicholson. You simply tape five minutes of Jack Nicholson and put it in your computer. And then you can be him walking around on the screen. The average kid will have access to film libraries and tapes. And even the news. Anything that’s on your television you can tape, change it and put yourself in it. So that these monopolies, which are typical of the industrial age, are not going to be as powerful.

WR: [laughs] Well, that’s a very reassuring thought.  

The great thing about being in movies is- and I think the movies and modern professional sports are the economic and cultural model of the future-that you’re a free agent. And that’s going to be typical of more and more people in the information age.


TL: There’s a new generation coming up. I'm sure you know this, but during the 1980s young people in this country became very conservative. For the next ten or fifteen years you’re going to see the colleges filled with kids of flower kids. You were not a flower child, but you were the child of a flower child. And you’re Dr. Spock’s grandkid. Your generation is simply hipper, more sophisticated, and less apt to become ’fifties-type stars. Isn’t that being a good role model?

WR: [embarrassed laughter] I suppose. As I said before, my day is determined by what I put on in the morning.

Image

TL: I hate to ask this question, Noni. What did you put on this morning?

WR: Oh, I put on The Mission sound track. It’s my favorite thing now. It’s really beautiful. But I don’t know. I’m at that age where every day is different. One day I think to myself, I’m going to do this for the rest of my life. And the next day I think, I’m going to do that for the rest of my life. And one day I think I’m going to take everything light and life is great, and I’m just going to take things day by day, and I’m going to live in the moment and all that stuff. And then the next day I’m going to plan out everything. I’m going to have a map, and my road is paved. So I’m constantly changing, and I really do believe in living life in the moment I think that that’s important I got a great piece of advice from Trey Wilson, who was in Great Balls of Fire and Raising Arizona. He said, “You always have to remember to have a good time. No matter what you’re doing, just have a good time. Enjoy it. Because if you don’t, then what are you doing it for?” Of course, I’ve gotten this advice before, but for some reason when he said it to me I really started to think about it.

TL: The great thing about being in movies is—and I think the movies and modern professional sports are the economic and cultural model of the future— that you’re a free agent. And that’s going to be typical of more and more people in the information age. I have a game I used to play at parties in Hollywood. I would ask people, “If you had to go to another planet and you could take ten movies with you, which ten would you take?" Which would you take, Noni?

WR: A Face in the Crowd. To Kill a Mockingbird. Opening Night, a John Cassavetes movie. The Tempest ...

TL: Oh, the one that Susan Sarandon was in.

WR: Let me see... Picnic at Hanging Rock, probably. Maybe Gallipoli. Don't Look Now. Of course, that would be hard to watch in space [laughs], because we’d probably get really scared. Walkabout. I love Nicolas Roeg. Then maybe West Side Story. And I really love the original Something Wild, with Carroll Baker and Ralph Meeker and Mildred Dunnock.

TL: When was that done?

WR: It was made in 1961, and it was based on a novel that was really big in the 1950s, called Mary Ann. It was one of those cheesy little novels, but it was a great movie. And The Stripper, with Joanne Woodward.

TL: Would you ever want to direct?

WR: Maybe. I’ve fantasized about it I’ve done seven movies. And I’ve learned so much about good directing from bad directing. And I’ve learned from bad lighting how important good lighting is. In terms of working with actors, my favorite approach is when I’m directed without being intentionally directed. Michael Lehmann, the guy who directed Heathers, as amazing. We’d be setting up to do a scene and he would start to tell me a story, and I would have no idea that it had any relevance to the scene we were about to shoot But before I knew it we would have shot the scene. He would have maneuvered me into the scene and put me in the perfect state of mind just by telling me some weird little story. It gets really distracting when directors start saying [in a “serious” voice], “Okay, this is what we’re going to do.” I hate it when they start out with that.

TL: So you’ll have to learn how to tell stories to your actors. That’s the tradition of the Zen person, or of the Sufi storyteller. You tell a funny story and then pretty soon it’s all happened.

WR: Yeah. I usually get involved with whatever I’m doing and it becomes my life for those couple of months. Because I’ve immersed myself so many times, I know a lot about it, but it’s all sort of in this hurricane in my head. It’s not very clear yet It’s all up there, but not in any sort of order.

TL That’s the quantum-physics theory of the universe. It’s up there, but it’s out of order. You don’t have to apologize for that You’re right on beam [laughs].
admin
Site Admin
 
Posts: 36135
Joined: Thu Aug 01, 2013 5:21 am

Re: Chaos & Cyberculture, by Timothy Leary, Ph.D.

Postby admin » Fri Jun 14, 2019 7:16 am

Part 1 of 2

Image

IV. INFO-CHEMICALS & DRUG WARS
1. Conversation with William S. Burroughs
2. The Sociology of LSD
3. Just Say Know: The Eternal Antidote to Fascism
4. Czar Bennett & His Holy War on Drugs
5. MDMA: The Drug of the 1980s
6. The Case for Intelligent Drug Use


Image

IV.1. Conversation with William S. Burroughs

TIMOTHY LEARY: Do you want to do this, William?

WILLIAM S. BURROUGHS: Why not?

TL: The first topic is immortality. You know, I signed up for cryonics. Have you thought about cryonics?

WSB: Ah... I thought about it, but no, no, no. 1 feel that any sort of physical immortality is going in the wrong direction. It’s a question of separating whatever you choose to call it—the soul—from the body, not perpetuating the body in any way. I think any perpetuation of the body is a step in the wrong direction. The Egyptians made their mummies, and preservation of the mummy was essential to their immortality. I think you want to get away from the body, not get into it.

TL: Why not have the option of readily jumping consciousness back into the body? You know, the Egyptians are really interesting. 1 see the tombs basically as re-animation capsules.

WSB: That’s exactly...

TL: They used the highest science at the time. I've been working with some scientists in this new field called bio-anthropology. During twenty-five centuries there were four waves of tomb robbers. The first wave took the gold, the second wave took the art, and then came the British and the French. All these looters threw the wrappings—which were clotted with dried blood—into the corner. But now microbiologists can get DNA from the bio-remains. So the Egyptian plan has actually worked. Within ten years we'll be able to clone the pharaohs! Of course, the problem is, there would be no memories. But that’s why they included their software in the form of the jewels and artifacts. I admire that.

Your book on The Western Lands fascinated me. 1 read it over and over again, and 1 quote you quite a bit in the stuff I write about cryonics.

How about postbiologic possibilities? Moravek—all of that. He says you can download the human brain and fit it in computers and build a new body with brush-like antenna software...

WSB: Certainly, certainly.

TL: How about language as a virus, Michel Foucault?

WSB: Language is obviously a virus, as it depends on replication. What other weighty topics do we have?

TL: Your paintings, shotgun and otherwise ... of course, Brion Gysin was always the one doing the painting.

WSB: You see, I could never have started painting really until after Brion Gysin was dead. 1 could never have competed with him. But now I’ve made more money than he did his whole life.

TL: You’ve made probably more money from your paintings than your books, huh?

WSB: It’s pulled me out of a financial hole. 1 can buy flintlock pistols.

TL: Good for you. It’s an easier way to make money than running around giving lectures and debating G. Gordon Liddy.

WSB: Flintlock pistols are great.

TL: And what do you think about Liddy? You know Liddy’s a big gun man.

WSB: Yes, O know. I know as much about guns as he does.

WSB: One-half the people-this is a sex survey-thought anal intercourse could result in AIDS even though neither one of the participants was infected with the AIDS virus. The Immaculate Conception!

TL: The Immaculate Infection!


TL: Let’s go on to the Drug-War hysteria.

WSB: Oh, now listen. Just a couple of tips, something that nobody has gone into, in this whole drug debate, is the simple fact that before the Harrison Narcotics Act in 1914, these drugs were sold across the counter.

TL: Opium, cocaine?

... before the Harrison Narcotics Act in 1914, these drugs were sold across the counter.... Opium, cocaine, morphine, heroin. Sold over the counter. Well, these were in the days that the conservatives evoke as "the good old days." Was America floundering? Of course it wasn’t. And how well the English system worked, until the American Brain Commission came over there and talked them out of it.


WSB: Opium, cocaine, morphine, heroin. Sold over the counter. Well, these were in the days that the conservatives evoke as “the good old days” Was America floundering? Of course it wasn’t. And how well the English system worked, until the American Brain Commission came over there and talked them out of it. When I was there in 1967 and took the apomorphine cure with Dr. Dent, there were about six hundred addicts in the U.K., all registered and all known because they could obtain their heroin quite legally—cocaine and cannabis tincture, too. Now that they’ve made it impossible, and the doctors won’t prescribe to addicts, God knows how many addicts we have. God knows how many narcotics agents.

TL: Once I took heroin in London with R. D. Laing. Ronnie sent out to the chemist. Ronnie Laing shot me up in the house of Alex Trocchi. Do you remember Trocchi?

WSB: Knew him well.

TL Switzerland is interesting. They have parks in Zurich and other places where junkies can go. The attitude is humanistic. “We’re one family; we’re all Swiss. And if our junkies want to shoot up, we’ll provide clean needles.” There’s no criminality involved.

WSB: I remember at one point I was at one of these Dutch places where they had needles and works—you put a coin in a thing and out came the needle.

TL: Works-o-matic.

WSB: Works-o-matic! Look at the history, the fact that for years there was no British heroin problem. The system worked very well.

TL: Well, the problem is the Puritan, Cromwellian moralists who have imposed their fucking neuroses on America and England for the last hundred years. Any sort of pleasure, or sort of idea that the individual has a right to pursue happiness, and they’re after you. It’s basically inquisitional... religiose. 1 blame the Puritans.

WSB: Well, perhaps, yes. But the thing is... I don’t quite agree with that. The basic thing is how that creates a desire, a necessity in their minds to control the whole population. And the extent to which the general public has been stupidized is appalling. Have you heard these statistics? The polls show that one-half of the high-school graduates could not locate Vietnam on the map and did not know that we had fought and lost a war there? When you take WWII, forget it! They never heard of Churchill, couldn’t locate France. The only one they knew about was Hitler.

TL Costumes! He had the best wardrobe, that’s why.

WSB: And 8 percent couldn’t locate the United States on a map. It’s absolutely appalling. Now listen to this one. One-half the people—this is a sex survey—thought anal intercourse could result in AIDS even though neither one of the participants was infected with the AIDS virus. The Immaculate Conception!

TL: The Immaculate Infection!

WSB: Can you imagine such nonsense? Such a complete lack of logic. One-half!

[James Grauerholtz announces it's time to go to the Leary-Liddy debate.]

TL: I want to say one more thing, William. You’re with me every day. I talk about you all the time. I’ve learned so much from you, with you. And I'll be back.

WSB: And I think about you.

IV.2. The Sociology of LSD

In 1973 the federal drug agency estimated that more than seven million Americans had used LSD. When this number of young and/or influential people engages in an activity passionately denounced by every respectable organ of society as dangerous, chaotic, immoral, and illegal, we have a social phenomenon that is worthy of study. Here is a fascinating development: a new sin! A new counterculture. A new evil crime.

I hope the following observations will encourage anthropologists and sociologists to undertake more systematic analysis of the survival implications of this mass behavior. Even a Gallup poll in which users could describe the effect that LSD tripping had on their lives might produce provocative data—if we are ready to face the facts.

IT WAS JUST ONE OF THOSE TIMES

Image

The postwar baby-boom generation that came into adolescence during the 1960s was probably the most affluent, confident, indulged crop in human history. Many social forces conspired to encourage this group to expect and demand more from life. The 'sixties kids were free from the economic fears that had dominated the lives of their depression-scarred parents. America was in a period of expansion and growth. Recruiters from large businesses used to line up on campuses to beg students to consider well-paying jobs! The nuclear fears that plagued the 1950s were quiescent The new psychology of humanism and personal growth, developed by Carl Rogers, Abraham Maslow, encounter groups, and other developments of the human-potential movement reactivated the basic Emersonian values of self-exploration, self-reliance, transcendence of fear-inspired orthodoxies. The art world, always seminal in countercultural change, seethed with the effects of expressionism, improvisation, individualism. Chaos engineering. Even the staid physical sciences were exploding with theories of Einsteinian relativity, Heisenbergian alternate realities, expanding universes.

This had happened before. At similar moments in history when cultures reached similar states of national security, economic prosperity, and imperial confidence, the inevitable next step has been to look within. A counterculture encourages novel art forms and lifestyles, tolerates individual search for new meaning—self-indulgence, as opposed to survival drudgery and coerced indulgence of elite rulers. Exactly at these times when philosophy, science, art, religion vibrate with transcendent energies, two things often happen: external exploration into undiscovered geographical realms, and inner exploration using brain-change drugs.

The first book of the Vedas, the West's oldest extant spiritual text, emerging at the time of the Aryan conquest of India, defined the drug soma as the basic tool for philosophic inquiry.

The Athenians were pioneer navigators: self-reliant, empirical, antidogmatic people. The Greek mystery cult of Eleusis, which invigorated Mediterranean thought for many centuries, used an LSD-type substance (from ergot of barley) in its annual rebirth ceremonies.

This had happened before. At similar moments in history when cultures reached similar states of national security, economic prosperity, and imperial confidence, the inevitable next step has been to look within.


The Renaissance eruption of individuality and free thought inspired great explorations, east and west, which brought back herbs, spices, unguents that added to the hedonic movements of the time.

R. Gordon Wasson, Richard Evans Schultes, Jonathan Ott, Terence McKenna, and other ethnobotanical scholars have argued that most of the great world religions were based on inner exploration employing brain-changing vegetables. The British Empire was supported for over a century by the opium trade, which was clearly related to the flowering of romantic, mystical, transcendental thought in England. Darwin, for example, was a chronic hypochondriac and a respectable opium addict.

THE SOUTH INVADES THE NORTH WITH BOTANICAL AGENTS

Image
MARK McCLOUD • PSYCHEDELIC SOLUTION

The acculturation of psychedelic drugs by Americans in the 1960s provides a powerful endorsement of religious rituals from the tropical latitudes. The psychedelic drugs are all derived from tropical plants. Psilocybin from mushrooms, mescaline from peyote, LSD from grain ergot, DMT and ayahuasca from tree bark and vines, and, of course, marijuana—the oldest cultivated plant on the planet These are not the euphoriants, or energizers, or intoxicants favored by urban dwellers. Psychedelics produce states of possession, trance, delightful chaoticness, expanded consciousness, spiritual illumination, powerful, mystical empathies with natural forces. These experiences, which are the aim of the ancient humanist, pagan religions, are the worst nightmares of the organized religions.

The so-called ’sixties “drug culture” was not a campus fad; it was a world-wide renaissance of the oldest religions. The hippies intuitively sensed this as they proudly wandered around barefoot, playing flutes. Paganism 101 suddenly became the most popular campus elective.

Psychiatrists and law-enforcement officials and politicians automatically assumed that psychedelic experiences were self-induced bouts of mass insanity, i.e., hallucinatory psychosis. There were no terms or paradigms in the Western intellectual tradition to explain this bizarre chaotic desire to “go out of your mind.”

It is of sociological interest that the drug culture in America and Western Europe (and more recently in segments of Eastern Europe) dutifully re-enacted the rituals of pre-Christian pagans and polytheists. In the 1960s and 1970s, millions living in industrial nations used psychedelics in the context of Hindu, Buddhist, and pagan practices. Psychedelic drugs were taken in groups and in public celebrations. The acid tests. The love-ins. The communes. The need for social bonding and tribal rituals was intuitively accepted by most psychedelic-drug users.

The importance of group support expressed in pagan-psychedelic experiences cannot be overestimated. The psychedelic culture proudly flaunted drug-taking because it was designed to produce nature-loving, tribe-solidarity, humanist experiences. The first San Francisco Be-In was advertised as “A Gathering of the Tribes.” This happens today at Grateful Dead concerts, when twenty thousand Deadheads routinely mingle together in dancing celebration.

INNER AND OUTER SPACE

Is it entirely accidental that our own space program, booming out to the stars, occurred exactly when our LSD-inspired inner-tripping was at its height? When the sense of national pride and confidence diminished during the Nixon years, both inner and outer exploration decreased. No surprise to any student of cultural evolution.

Can any acceptable history of our species fail to note the effects of drug countercultures and hedonic booms on the evolution of art and knowledge? Is it still too early for scholarly examination of our current drug culture, its antecedents and consequences? Well, let’s make a small beginning.

WHY DID THE LSD BOOM DECLINE?

We have just considered some factors that lead to the emergence of an hedonic-philosophic drug culture. Conservatives are quick to point out that transcendental, self-indulgent movements usually lead to the fall of civilizations. Did not hot tubs, Eastern drugs, and mystical cults sap the martial vigor of Imperial Rome?

Probably. But we must hasten to add that it was natural and right that Rome fall. In the unbroken migration of intelligence and individual freedom from east to west, Rome had its day in the sun. But would you w ant to be ruled today from Italy? High civilizations do not fall; they blossom and send their seed pollens westward. Have not the descendants of the wily Sicilian Italians planted their roots today in Hollywood and Las Vegas? According to such observers as Kissinger, Herman Kahn, Reverend Falwell, and the Shah of Iran, our current hedonic drug culture represents a sophisticated corruption of the puritan American ethos. But in their self-serving zeal to restore the old morality, these imperialists fail to realize that hedonic movements go through predictable states of growth just like other social phenomena, and that the current American transcendentalism has hardly gotten started.

Hippies were the first naive, innocent, idealistic babies of the new neurological-information society. Hippies were passive consumers of the new technology, childish Utopians who believed that tie-dyed clothes, Grateful Dead concerts, and parroted love slogans w ere the ultimate flowers of evolution.

The hippie wave declined because its members were too passive, opting for enlightenment at the nearest dealer’s pad. Advertising usually does get ahead of production in the development of new culture-changing technologies, and I am ready to accept responsibility for that No blame, though. When a species wants an evolutionary tool, it will get it in a generation or two. By 1970 there were, apparently, some seven million lazy consumers expecting to be given the easy ticket to brain change. Meanwhile the feds had snuffed out the few reliable manufacturers. Predictably, the land was flooded with unreliable, low-quality acid. Good-hearted amateurs combined with unscrupulous scoundrels to distribute an inferior product.

Thus the wholesome decline in LSD use, which stimulated exactly what the drug culture needed. Smarten up, Sister. Smarten up, Brother! People were no longer so naively utopian. They warily thought twice before tripping. And the challenge, which no sophisticated chemist could resist, to produce high-quality LSD, was thrown down.

The last two decades have just whetted humanity’s eternal appetite for technologies to activate and direct one’s own brain function. The drug movement has just begun.


Image
BIGWOOD

THE THIRD GENERATION OF BRAIN-CHANGE DRUGS

The first generation of psychedelic technology involved primitive preparation of botanicals: joint-rolling, hashish hookahs, bongs. The second generation of psychedelic technologies involved the synthesis of mescaline, psilocybin, LSD, DMT, STP, MDA—all crude, Wright brothers, Model-T stuff.

The third generation of brain-change drugs is now appearing in plentiful quantities. Designer drugs. Just as computers today are more efficient, cheaper, and more reliable than those thirty years ago, so are the new drugs. Home domestication of mushrooms is one charming example.

Psychedelics produce states of possession, trance, delightful chaoticness, expanded consciousness, spiritual illumination, powerful, mystical empathies with natural forces.


The time-consuming, complex, delicate, unwieldy procedures for synthesizing LSD have been streamlined so that, from police reports of arrests and sociological observations, we learn that more LSD is being used today than in the 1960s. There is almost no publicity, because drug usage is no longer a trendy topic for the media and politicians. We have new problems—oil, economics, crack, the new Cold War. There are almost no bad trips being reported, because the acid is pure and the users are sophisticated. The average suburban teenager today knows more about the varied effects of brain-change drugs than the most learned researchers twenty years ago. The proliferation of knowledge always works this way. The socialization of drugs has followed the same rhythm as the use and abuse of automobiles, airplanes, computers.

And the next decade will see the emergence of dozens of new, improved, stronger, safer psychoactive drugs. Any intelligent chemist knows it: There is an enormous market of some fifty million Americans today who would joyfully purchase a safe euphoriant, a precise psychedelic of short duration and predictable effect, an effective intelligence increaser, a harmless energizer, a secure sensual enhancer. An aphrodisiac! For millennia, intelligent persons undergoing the vicissitudes of aging have longed for an effective aphrodisiac. Only recently have we realized that the ultimate, indeed the only, pleasure organ is the brain, an enormous hundred-billion-cell hedonic system waiting to be activated.

The last two decades have just whetted humanity’s eternal appetite for technologies to activate and direct one’s own brain function. The drug movement has just begun.

THE RESURGENCE OF GOOD OLD LSD

The increased usage of acid is the forerunner of what is to come, and much can be learned from its resurgence. Now that the hysteria has died down, is it not obvious that LSD, pure LSD, is simply the best recreational/enlightenment drug around? A curious reversal of Gresham’s law seems to operate, if good dope is available, it will be preferred. If good dope is in short supply, then bad drugs will be used. Good dope drives out bad dope.

During the recent LSD shortage did we not see a shocking emergence of teenage alcoholism? Don’t you remember how drunks were scorned in the 1960s? The horrid PCP mania is directly caused by the acid drain. So is the cocaine mania, the post-Shah heroin epidemic. Looking at the shoddy replacements, is it not clear that psychedelic drugs are exactly what our Harvard research showed them to be in the 1960s? Wonderful gifts from the plant queendom to the animal kingdom; activators of those circuits of the brain that lead to philosophic inquiry, scientific curiosity, somatic awareness, hedonic lifestyle, humourous detachment, high-altitude tolerant perceptions, chaotic erotics, ecological sensitivity, utopian communality.

Weren’t the 1960s, in retrospect, a decade of romance, splendor, optimism, idealism, individual courage, high aspirations, aesthetic innovation, spiritual wonder, exploration, and search? As President Reagan might have said, weren’t we happier about each other and more optimistic when the high times were rolling?

In the Rambo 1980s, drugs were tooted, shot, free-based, cracked in secrecy. Often alone.

Drug-taking becomes drug abuse when practiced in narcissistic solitude. In 1988, thirty million Americans used illegal drugs safely, and fifty million used booze moderately. Indulgence in group rituals protects against abuse. Beer busts. Cocktail parties. Smoking grass or eating mushrooms with friends.

It is important to note that the only effective rehabilitation program for alcohol and drug abusers is A.A. The stated aims and tactic of A.A. are pagan-spiritual. Surrender to a higher power in an intense support-group setting. No churches. No government officials. No salaries. No funding. Just village-type group support.

THE WINTER OF FEAR AND DISCONTENT

Our psychedelic-drug research projects at Harvard and later Millbrook vigorously addressed the task of developing brain-change methods for eliminating human ignorance and suffering. We knew it could be done and that, eventually, it would be done. Biochemical knowledge will be applied to manage the synaptic patterns which keep people bogged down in repetitious helplessness. Self-managed brain control is in the future deck.

This seemed so commonsensical that it was hard for us to understand, in 1962, how any open-minded person could oppose the planful accessing of altered states of consciousness. Granted that the field was new and the avalanche of new data confusing, the parallels to the discovery of the microscope and telescope were so obvious that we were naively unprepared for the instinctive revulsion expressed by so many intelligent, distinguished scientists at the notion of brain change. Alan Watts, always the wry student of history, never tired of reminding us that Vatican astronomers consistently refused to look through Galileo’s telescopes.

Our initial romantic idealism was soon sobered by the realization that there are powerful genetic mechanisms, reinforced by society, geared to react with fear at the approach of the new. This neophobia obviously has a survival value. At every stage of evolution each gene pool has been protected by those with nervous systems wired to cry Danger! Caution!

The evolutionist urging change says, “There is nothing to fear except fear itself.” The survivalist replies, “There is everything to fear except fear itself.” At most periods of human history those who promote fear have been in ascendance. When we examine every other form of life, we see that a nervous, jumpy animal alertness to danger is a constant preoccupation.

At certain times in the emergence of civilization, optimistic change-agents, believers in progress, manage to push our species into new adventures. Then, inevitably, the forces of caution, reason, tradition reimpose fear to preserve what the change-agents have created.

America has, since its conception, represented an optimistic, progressive future probe of the human race. Our country was founded by restless visionaries from the Olde World, who decided that anything new was better than the status quo. Such people are genetically wired to stir up excitement and adventure and unsettling discovery. This red-white-and-blue romantic pursuit of liberty and happiness, it seems to me, peaked in the 1960s. A generation of young Americans threw caution to the winds and recklessly rejected the fear-imposed systems that have kept human society surviving—the work ethic, male domination, racism, lifestyle conformity, inhibition of sensuality and self-indulgence, reliance on authority.

Since our research had demonstrated that set and setting determine the course of an altered-state experience, we consistently broadcast signals of intelligent reassurance: "Trust your nervous system, go with the flow. the universe is basically a beautiful and safe place.”

Image


Image

"Timothy Leary, much to our surprise, showed, in 200 cells, only two with chromosome aberrations, one in each cell. This finding is about as spectacular as must be the amount of LSD that he probably has taken in the past eight years. I am at a loss to understand or explain this negative finding."

—Hermann Lisco, M.D.
Cancer Research Institute
New England Deaconess Hospital
Boston, Mass.


Fear, which has always been the glue that holds human hives together, was temporarily replaced by audacious, grinning confidence in a self-directed future.

Since our research had demonstrated that set and setting determine the course of an altered-state experience, we consistently broadcast signals of intelligent reassurance: “Trust your nervous system, go with the flow, the universe is basically a beautiful and safe place.” We were amazed to witness otherwise intelligent and open-minded persons doing everything in their power to instill fear, to cry danger, to slander the brain with negativity. Do we recall the hoax perpetrated by the Pennsylvania Hospital director who invented the lie that eight patients were blinded by looking at the Sun while high on LSD? The chromosome-breaking prevarication? The armies of police officials visiting high schools to warn that smoking LSD would lead to rape and murder? We were forced to conclude at one point that LSD does indeed cause panic and temporary insanity—in bureaucrats who have never touched the stuff.

We were comforted by the history of science. Every new technology that compels change in lifestyle or in understanding of human nature has always taken one generation to be socialized and domesticated. The more furious and extravagant were the attacks on LSD, the more certain we became that an important mutational process was involved.

What was lost in the furor was any rational attempt to assay what was really happening. Few Americans realized, for example, that the drug culture was the purposeful creation of an extraordinary group of scholars and people-movers who worked in loose but conscious coordination to sponsor self-directed brain change: Aldous and Laura Huxley, Gerald Heard, R. D. Laing, Thelma Moss, Alan Watts, Adelle Davis, Gordon and Valentina Wasson, Stanislaus Grof, Joan Halifax, Ren Kesey, Allen Ginsberg, Paul Bowles, John and Louis Aiken, Huston Smith, Cary Grant, the brigades of philosopher-musicians who used lyrics to teach, the armies of writers and underground newspaper editors, the filmmakers, the chemists. Never, perhaps, since Athens and the Renaissance had so many culturally influential people been allied around a philosophic concept.

Also discarded in the controversy was any rational, scientific attempt to keep score. Granted, a lot of mentally disturbed persons took acid and then blamed the drug for their genetic instability, but there was never any comparative census count Now that the smoke has cleared, we see that far from inducing window-jumping and self-destruction, the suicide rate for young people actually dropped during the LSD boom. Suicide is caused by boredom and hopelessness—and certainly these factors were lowered during the 1960s.

And surely it is obvious that psychedelic drugs, including cannabis, lower the violence indices. There are more alcohol-induced episodes of violence in one weekend these days than in the twenty years of psychedelic drug-taking. More kids are killed and crippled in any weekend by booze plus automobile-driving than during two decades of psychedelic consumption. There is no evidence to counter the claim that LSD drastically lowered the incidence of physical danger in those who tripped. It was Vietnam that killed more than fifty thousand young Americans and several million Vietnamese. Acid is probably the healthiest recreational pursuit ever devised by humans. Jogging, tennis, and skiing are far more dangerous. If you disagree, show me your statistics.

This is not to say that the real dangers of LSD were exaggerated. Consciousness-altering drugs change minds and loosen attachments to old customs. Change triggers off intense fear reactions. Acid is a scary thing.

No one said it was going to be simple, and here is another complication. Acid should not be taken by scared persons or in a fearful setting. America is a spooked country these days. The genetic caste of danger-criers is operating in full voice. Never in our history has the national mood been so gloomy and spooky. The cause is obvious. Change causes fear, and the change rate is accelerating beyond comprehension and control. Chaotics! All the familiar comforts of yesterday are eroding with ominous rapidity. While the population rises, all the indices of intelligence, educational achievement, civility, and physical and economic security are plummeting. At the same time, paradoxically, the accomplishments of our scientific elite are eliminating the basic, eternal causes of human helplessness. Geneticists and immunologists predict enormous advances against illness, aging, and death. The space program has opened up a new frontier of unlimited energy, unlimited raw materials, unlimited room for migration. The new information society based on computers and home-communication centers is multiplying human intelligence to undreamed-of capacities. We are being flooded with new and better brain-change drugs.

There are more alcohol-induced episodes of violence in one weekend these days than in the twenty years of psychedelic drug-taking.... Acid is probably the healthiest recreational pursuit ever devised by humans. Jogging, tennis, and skiing are far more dangerous. If you disagree, show me your statistics.... Now, more than ever before, we need to gear our brains to multiplicity, complexity, relativity, change. Those who can handle acid will be able to deal more comfortably with what is to come....


The only way to understand and keep up with this acceleration of knowledge is to accelerate brain function. There are three suggested solutions to the seething, volatile situation that we now face.  

• The religious answer is that since apocalypse is inevitable, the only thing to do is pray.

• The politicians assure us that the only thing to do is grab what you can and protect what you've got.

• The scientific answer is to increase intelligence, expand your consciousness, surf the waves of chaotic change planfully.

The future is going to spin faster and wilder, of that we can be sure. If you don’t like acid, rest assured you’re not going to like the future. Now, more than ever before, we need to gear our brains to multiplicity, complexity, relativity, change. Those who can handle acid will be able to deal more comfortably with what is to come.

A PERSONAL NOTE

People often ask me if, in hindsight, I would do it all over again. My answer, in foresight, is: Like it or not, we are doing it over again. And better.

Image

Fascism: A philosophy or system of government that advocates or exercises an authoritarian rule of the extreme right, typically through the merging of state, military, religious, and industrial leadership, together with an ideology of belligerent nationalism. For synonym, see Communism.

IV.3. Just Say Know:

America, strangely enough, is becoming the global leader in developing new forms of fascist repression: mind control via control of brain-change medications.... The original model of a "people’s democracy” (or a third reich or a dictatorship of the proles) was none other than the Republican party, USA. In 1866, while the European powers were struggling out of feudalism, our very own GOP produced the first, and most successful, fascist state.


The primitive mammalian emotions of fear and fight are mediated by the autonomic nervous system. When aroused, these reflexes produce in herd animals (including the most civilized human beings) the familiar, involuntary, irrational, pleasurable behavior called tantrum.

There is one strategy and four standard tactics used by certain male castes to maintain mastery over the herd, troop, flock, etc. These domination signals invoke this fear-fight reflex.

The strategy is to invent or provoke herd panic. This is variously called jihad, crusade, Holy War. The four classic control tactics are daemonization, fanatic rage, sacrifice, and repression.

DAEMONIZATION:

To arouse the fear reflex one must convince the flock that it is menaced by a deadly evil. This peril must be more than a negotiable pressure from competitive neighbours. It must involve a moral difference. The alien enemy must be seen as a satanic threat to “our” way of life. To compromise in the slightest degree with this implacable foe would betray fatal weakness.

FANATIC RAGE:

Since this peril threatens our very way of life, a fever of national belligerence is clearly in order. War frenzy is mobilized via metaphor and symbol. The enemy is powerful. Everywhere. A cancer. An Evil Empire out to destroy us. A moral plague.

We all have, somewhere in our jittery midbrains, those ancient, down-home, turf-territory, snarling, racial programs which trigger off violent rage. Hey, anger can be a powerful kick! There’s the paroxysmal convulsion that Dad uses to control the family. There’s the cold, implacable, slit-eyed pressing of the Pentagon button. And then there’s the impersonal, bureaucratic compulsion to humiliate those under your control, for example, by forcing them to urinate, on command, into a bottle.

Moral outrage allows one to perform extreme, genocidal cruelties upon the daemonic enemy without guilt. The Holy War brings undeniable satisfaction to those trapped in any form of inhibited or frustrated boredom. When the mob or the electorate go crazy together, there’s a certain blood-warm sense of secure togetherness, of hive or herd unity.

SACRIFICE:

To combat the deadly peril, great sacrifices must be made. Our defenders, the brave soldiers, the valiant policemen, the concerned politicians, must be given money, without stinting. What concerned citizen could be niggardly when our very moral existence is at stake? Who could oppose increasing taxes to fund this crusade?
admin
Site Admin
 
Posts: 36135
Joined: Thu Aug 01, 2013 5:21 am

Re: Chaos & Cyberculture, by Timothy Leary, Ph.D.

Postby admin » Fri Jun 14, 2019 7:16 am

Part 2 of 2

The Eternal Antidote to Fascism: KNOW

REPRESSION:


During a crusade of this intensity, it is only logical that the normal, easygoing individual freedoms, the lax tolerance, the civil rights, the civilian protections of peacetime and logical debate must be suspended for the duration.

Party propaganda replaces truthful discourse. The “big lie” is eagerly accepted and repeated. The citizen’s duty during an all-out war is unquestioning obedience, which is enforced by the no-nonsense police. Difference of opinion about the wisdom of the war is intolerable.

The existence of a strong, visible rival justifies the authoritarian control. The stronger and more menacing the enemy, the better. The basic threat to the authoritarian system is not the external enemy, but dissident citizens who question authority and think for themselves. The fascist-communist state is obsessively alert to detect and destroy self-reliance, self-confidence, self-discipline, self-respect, self-direction.

And now to eliminate the new and ultimately dangerous threat to an authoritarian system —self-medication Self-management of one’s own brain.

It is no accident, obviously, that in the year 1988, the ruling caste in America, the source nation of freedom and affluent consumerism, decided that self-medication is the number-one enemy to be eradicated totally by “final solutions” involving “zero-tolerance.”

America, strangely enough, is becoming the global leader in developing new forms of fascist repression: mind control via control of brain-change medications.

It was not always this way in the United States. Alter its founding (1776) the fledgling American Republic presented, perhaps for the first time in human history (Australia and New Zealand came later), a most inhospitable habitat for the authoritarian-military impulse. The extraordinary isolation from external threat afforded by the almost empty new continent, the WASP homogeneity of the tiny population, the exciting challenges of building frontier settlements made it almost impossible to whip up a true Holy War.

Oh yes, there had been the Salem witch trials. The silly low-budget War of 1812, stirred up by the “Hawks,” provided a few naval slogans. And the fortuitous presence of those pesky, omniscient heathen Indians produced a few pitiful national leaders like General Andrew Jackson and General (Tippecanoe) Harrison.

By 1860 the adolescent America was suffering from an acute “enemy deprivation.” With the natives wiped out, there just wasn’t any Evil Enemy on whom to commit belligerent nationalism. So the military Hawks, West Point trained, fell to quarreling amongst themselves. The War between the States (1861-65) was, at that time, the bloodiest conflict in history. All wars are convulsions of paroxysmal violence, but in retrospect, our Civil War has to be one of the most irrational: West Point classmates leading mechanically equipped armies against each other.

It is no accident, obviously, that in the year 1988, the ruling caste in America, the source nation of freedom and affluent consumerism, decided that self- medication is the number-one enemy to be eradicated totally by "final solutions” involving "zero-tolerance.”


Image
R U CYBER
Just say "KNOW"


There was a genetic logic at play here.

The Civil War produced, for the first time in human history, the new update on the old feudal-authoritarian program: the emergence of the industrial-military society. Let’s give credit where credit is due. Forget that upstart Prince Otto Edward Leopold von Bismarck. Forget the copy-cat Vladimir Dyich Lenin and the later impertinent mimicry of Stalin and Brezhnev. Forget even Benito Mussolini. Credit our very own, home-grown, WASP, Yankee-Doodle ingenuity. It was Honest Abe Lincoln who created the first and enduring model of a fascist society—the authoritarian-military-industrial complex controlled by an elite “nomenclature” known in every modem state as “the grand old party.”

The Heritage House think tank (Edwin Meese et al.) that guides the party today is understandably quite modest about its historical importance. The original model of a “people’s democracy” (or a third reich or a dictatorship of the proles) was none other than the Republican party, USA. hi 1866, while the European powers were struggling out of feudalism, our very own GOP produced the first, and most successful, fascist state.

The ruling “industrial-military party” in America organized during the Lincoln administration has managed to keep one Holy War after another going for more than a hundred years. The genocidal Indian Wars gave us the final solution to the redskin problem. The Spanish War, sparked by the big lies of Mr. Hearst, announced our manifest destiny to become a superpower. Our pointless participation in World War I? Belligerent nationalism! World War II? The nuclear holocausts of Hiroshima-Nagasaki? The endless Cold War against the Evil Empire? Korea? Vietnam? Belligerent nationalism! In 1980 Americans elected as president Ronald Reagan, a cheerful, mindless fanatic totally dedicated to the party’s authoritarian-military compulsions.

Once again, in the struggle for liberty, the motto becomes JUST SAY KNOW.


But a pesky problem emerged. The fiasco of Vietnam had left the country in no mood for a war binge. Rhetoric about “standing tall against the Evil Empire” could get record funding for the defense industry, but there was no target-outlet for the frustrations that had been building up for decades. Grenada was a meaningless twitch. The annoying little dictators in Nicaragua, Libya, and later, Panama, could hardly be taken seriously.

The Reagan Hawks were armed to the teeth, all dressed up in uniforms, but had nowhere to go. So, once again, the “nomenclature” fell back on the old standby: a Civil War. A jihad against an insidious domestic enemy corrupting us from within. The new scapegoat victims. The perverted smokers of the Assassin of Youth, the killer weed.

THE HOLY WAR ON SELF-MEDICATION

During the last Democratic administration (1976-80), fourteen states decriminalized marijuana, and President Carter announced his intention to do the same at the federal level. Carter was also active in promoting civil and human rights.

Shortly after the Grand Old Party assumed power in 1980, the standard belligerent nationalism ploy was dusted off. The Cold War against the Evil Empire was re-declared. Military budgets and the national deficits suddenly launched toward all-time peaks. But the Soviet Union under Gorbachev wouldn’t play the game, and the threats from Iran-Qaddafi-Grenada-Central America were too feeble to justify a war economy.

So the Civil War card was played. A Holy War on Vegetables was declared. Illegal herbs were denounced as “cancers,” moral plagues, lethal threats to national security. Politicians of both parties immediately fell into line, and the media, sensing circulation boosts and an audience hunger for moral outrage, scrambled to dramatize the menace.

There was no debate! No rational public discussion about the wisdom of waging a Civil War against some thirty million fellow-Americans who knew from experience that grass is less dangerous than booze. No questions about the commonsense practicality of violating that most basic frontier of liberty, the body and the brain.

Children were applauded for turning in their parents. Fill the prisons. Hang the peddlers. Urine tests for civilian workers. When marijuana arrests reached five hundred thousand a year, Nancy Reagan’s Civil Warriors were far outstripping the Inquisition’s witch-hunts.

And still no audible protests against this blatant fascism! Why were the ACLU and the civil-rights movement so silent? Where was Amnesty International? Where were the libertarian traditions of this land of freedom?

CRITICS OF THE WAR ON DRUGS

Three recently published books deal brilliantly with the evils and absurdities of the War on Drugs.

• Dealing with Drugs, Consequences of Government Control, ed. by Ronald Hanowy. Lexington Books, 1987.

• Breaking the Impasse in the War on Drugs, by Steven Wisotsky. Greenwood Press, 1986.

• Why We Are Losing the Great War on Drugs and Radical Proposals That Could Make America Safe Again, by Arnold Trebach. Macmillan, 1987.

Dealing with Drugs is a collection of essays by ten distinguished university scholars who demonstrate with fact and logic that the War on Drugs is futile, harmful, irrational, immoral, illegal.

Professor Hanowy’s collection concludes with a magnificent essay, The Morality of Drug Controls. The author, psychiatrist Thomas Szasz, is one of the most important intellectuals of our times. For thirty years Szasz has brought to the dark, swampy field of psychiatry the same penetrating social logic and laser-sharp morality that Noam Chomsky has given to linguistics and politics. And more, because Dr. Szasz adds a certain down-to-earth, humanist common sense. He writes here, not about drugs, but about drug control as a moral issue, the “drug-user” as scapegoat.

A Holy War on Vegetables was declared.... Children were applauded for turning in their parents. Fill the prisons. Hang the peddlers. Urine tests for civilian workers. When marijuana arrests reached five hundred thousand a year, Nancy Reagan’s Civil Warriors were far outstripping the Inquisition’s witch-hunts. And still no audible protests against this blatant fascism! Why were the ACLU and the civil-rights movement so silent? Where was Amnesty International?... Once again, we are reminded that the only solution to human problems are intelligent thought and accurate, open communication.


I believe that just as we regard freedom of speech and religion as fundamental rights, so should we regard freedom of self-medication as a fundamental right; and that, instead of mendaciously opposing or mindlessly promoting illicit drugs, we should, paraphrasing Voltaire, make this maxim our rule: I disapprove of what you take, but I will defend to the death your right to take it.

Breaking the Impasse in the War On Drugs is a carefully researched, chilling account of the incalculable damages wrought upon our country and our southern neighbors by the Reagan regime’s War on Cocaine. Long sections describe the assault on justice and civil liberties, the growth of big brotherism, the corrosion of the work ethic, the corruption of public officials, disrespect for the law, the international pathology of the War on Drugs, instability and narco-terrorism, the drug-problem problem.

Arnold Trebach, the author of Why We Are Losing the Great War on Drugs and Radical Proposals That Could Make America Safe Again, examines in scholarly fashion the failures, the hypocrisies, the corruptions, the repressive illegalities of the Holy War, and presents fourteen commonsense, practical, compassionate “peaceful compromises.” Trebach goes behind the grim statistics to address the personal, human side of the conflict: interviews with and case histories of the victims—young people kidnapped by their own misguided parents; moderate, intelligent users harshly penalized; cancer, AIDS, and glaucoma patients prevented from using appropriate medication; street addicts caught in a system that treats them as criminals rather than as patients.

In the three books discussed, a total of twenty experts in the field agree that legal energy-mood-anaesthetic drugs (booze, nicotine, pills) are certainly as disabling and abusive as their illegal counterparts (heroin, marijuana, cocaine). They come to the common-sense conclusion that by decriminalizing and regulating the latter, we could reduce the “drug problem,” in one day, from a fatal social cancer to a treatable health annoyance.

THE WAR ON PSYCHEDELICS

The most pernicious and hypocritical aspect of the current drug situation is the criminalizing of psychedelic drugs. Used with a minimum of common sense, marijuana, LSD, mescaline, and psilocybin are valuable tools for exploring the brain and changing the mind. “Psychedelic” means mind expanding. These vegetable products have almost no effect on mood or energy level. They are the very opposite of the “opiate anaesthetics,” in that they produce hypersensitivity to external sensations and accelerated thought processing. They are not addictive. They have almost no effect on physiology. They change consciousness. They are information drugs. They have been used for millennia in religious ceremonies. Because they alter consciousness in such intense, individual ways, group rituals develop to support and protect the visionary trance. They are rarely used alone, because solitary visions create solipsistic “space-outs.”

Psychedelic vegetables—when used with optimum regard for “set and setting”—are arguably the safest food substances that human beings can ingest They obviously represent an ancient symbiosis between the sexual organs of flowering plants and the nervous systems of mammals to the mutual benefit of all concerned.

Since the dawning of the information age in 1946, these psychedelic plants have become extremely popular in regions where cybernetic-digital technologies (television, computers) have taken over. In the last twenty years the influence of psychedelic drugs on art, music, literature, fashion, language, electronic graphics, film, television commercials, holistic medicine, ecological awareness, and New-Age psychology has been so pervasive as to be invisible.

Image

Psychedelic vegetables -- when used with optimum regard tor "set and setting” -- are arguably the safest food substances that human beings can ingest. They obviously represent an ancient symbiosis between the sexual organs of flowering plants and the nervous systems of mammals to the mutual benefit of all concerned.


It is interesting that psychedelic substances are rarely mentioned by the Drug-War crusaders. Government experts and Newsweek editors rave and writhe about the dangerous pleasures of cocaine, the irresistible ecstasies of crack, the addictive seductions of heroin. One hit of these siren substances and you’re a slave to their power. But they never discuss the reasons why millions of non-addicts prefer to use marijuana or LSD, or the benign and gentle MDMA. The law-enforcement doctors mumble about “gateway” drugs and let it go at that That which you cannot possibly daemonize (“killer weed”) must be systematically ignored. The tactic is the familiar fear-fight line. Hey! This is no time for logical, academic discussions or treasonous undermining of the war effort! It’s an all-out conflict between good and evil! The Daemon Foe has our backs to the wall!

It is interesting that the authors of those three logical, scientific, libertarian books discussed above do not deal with the positive aspects of the psychedelic drugs, nor do they refer to the hundreds of scientific papers about the benefits, personal and cultural, which can occur if these drugs are used with prudence and planning. They are not psychologists or humanist philosophers, after all. Thank God!

Image

With calm unanimity these gentlemen come on as sober, rational academics. The attitude is magisterial, almost judicial. They express not one dot of approval for the use of mind-changing substances, legal or illegal. They condemn intoxication. They are opposed to the War on Vegetables only because it is futile and aggravates the problem. Occasionally they sigh in regret for the human weaknesses that lead people to seek change and solace in drugs. (It appears unlikely that any of these prudent academics has ever been high.) Their prescription is simple: Substitute government regulation and education for repression.

I enthusiastically applaud this statesmanly approach. It could work in Belfast, in the Middle East, in Afghanistan, and here in our own Civil War on Drugs.

Once again, we are reminded that the only solution to human problems are intelligent thought and accurate, open communication.

Once again, in the struggle for liberty, the motto becomes:

JUST SAY KNOW.

IV.4. Czar Bennett & His Holy War on Drugs

Image Czar: (1) a king or emperor. (2) a tyrant, autocrat.

Image Cossacks: D.E.A. agents.

Image Pogrom: (1) a domestic police action ordered by the Czar. (2) an organized and often officially encouraged persecution or massacre of people.

It is interesting to speculate why America is the only country in the world where self-medication has been decreed “Public Enemy Number One.”

Since 1776, the U.S. has been engaged in a moralistic tug-of-war. On one hand, America sees itself as the guardian and inventor of individual liberty, tolerance, secular plurality, ethnic diversity, cultural idiosyncrasy, scientific inventiveness, free enterprise, and independent thinking. Much of our literature and mythology has taught us that it is the sacred duty of the patriotic American to maintain a healthy disrespect for authority and to resist every attempt on the part of religious or political officials to intrude into our private lives or to impose cultural or religious conformity. The mythic America is good natured, individualistic and creative: rowdy Ben Franklin; sturdy rebel David Thoreau; feisty, elegant Margaret Fuller; irreverent Mark Twain.

At the same time, there has been, from the beginning, a severe and moralistic Calvinist side to American culture that is antithetical to the “liberal society” described above. Like fundamentalist Islam, the American puritans believe that people are divided into the Select and the Damned, the chosen people and the satanic sinners. Throughout history, this view has justified any number of crusades, morality crackdowns, witch-hunts, and Holy Wars.

Inflammatory Holy-War rhetoric, especially when spouted by politicians and governmental authorities, is the most dangerous drug of all. It arouses fear. It robs people of common sense and self-confidence.

Most recently, this view has fueled the Drug War, creating a social atmosphere that is violently impatient with hedonists of any kind. The War on Drugs is the quintessential American morality play. In it, we see clearly the distinctions between good and bad; insidious sinners and angry saints; outlaw gangs and the innocent, victimized majority. And this scenario is preached to us in easy to assess images in our newspapers and on our television screens.

The Drug War is fueled by the fact that at this historic moment, when American liberalism and free enterprise have “won” the Cold War, our politicians are suffering from enemy deprivation. Faced with the real problems of urban decay, slipping global competitiveness, and a deteriorating educational system, the government has decided instead to turn its energies toward the sixty million Americans who use illegal psychoactive drugs.

At the same time, there has been, from the beginning, a severe and moralistic Calvinist side to American culture... Like fundamentalist Islam, the American puritans believe that people are divided into the Select and the Damned, the chosen people and the satanic sinners.


CZAR BENNETT

Image Czar: (1) a king or emperor. (2) a tyrant, autocrat.

The use of this pre-Soviet Russian term could be viewed only as comic in a rational atmosphere. The official use of this loaded term suggests that D.E.A. agents be called “cossacks.” A domestic police action ordered by the Czar is usually called a “pogrom,” defined as “an organized and often officially encouraged persecution or massacre of people.”

Drug Czar William Bennett says that “with the weakening of political authority, the drug user, dealer, and trafficker believes that the laws forbidding their activities no longer have teeth, and they consequently feel free to violate those laws with impunity.”

This is bombast. At least in the demoralized and impoverished inner city, the crack-cocaine trade will not be eliminated through beefed-up law enforcement, expanded prison facilities, or any other sort of strengthened political authority. Drug abuse in these geographic areas has fairly obvious causes: poverty, despair, and the enormous profits created by criminalization. But the prohibitionists, who have injected the debate with the hyperbolic language of sin and savagery, escape without having to address these complex social issues.

How should we deal with Americans who advocate this Rambo-concept “war” as a final solution to our inner-city problems? First offenders like Dan Rather should be sternly warned. Regular offenders should be banned from the Supreme Court, the NFL, the ABA, the ABC. Holy-War advocates should have their driver’s licenses revoked and be sent to boot camp.

Multiple-offending adults like Nancy Reagan or Czar Bennett or Jesse Jackson, who hang around schools shamelessly dealing and advocating Holy War, should be committed to Abbie Hoffman De-Tox and Rehabilitation Centers.

DEFINITIONS AND CATEGORIES

DRUG:


1. a substance used as medicine in the treatment of disease; 2. a narcotic, especially one that is addictive.

LEGAL DRUGS:

Nicotine, alcohol, prescription tranquilizers, prescription sleepizers, prescription energizers.

ILLEGAL DRUGS:

Cocaine, heroin, marijuana, LSD, psilocybin mushrooms, peyote (except for Native American Church members), MDMA, etc.

Image

DANGEROUS DRUGS:

(deaths per year) alcohol (60,000), prescription drugs (30,000), nicotine (25,000), cocaine (3,000), heroin (1,000).

SAFE DRUGS:

(deaths per year) marijuana (0), LSD (0), psilocybin mushrooms (0), peyote (0), MDMA (0).

MOOD-CHANGE FOOD & DRUGS:

are basically uppers or downers. Caffeine, heroin, cocaine, pills. Mood changers tend to be private, loner medicaments, thus leading to addiction and alienation. Alcohol, the most popular mood changer, has been acculturated in the industrial Western world and is used as a social-bonding, ceremonial, festival agent. Solitary use leads to abuse.

PSYCHEDELIC FOODS & DRUGS:

Marijuana, peyote, mushrooms, ergots (LSD), empathogens (MDMA) have been used throughout history in social-bonding ceremonials, festive celebrations, and shamanic rituals. They usually do not energize. They are not addictive. They are not injected. The rare cases of solitary ingestion are considered eccentric and alienated. Psychedelic drugs are usually freely shared. They are pacifistic, nonviolent, reflective, and, with appropriate set-setting, aphrodisiac Public officials of the prohibitionist persuasion who lump marijuana with cocaine and heroin are hypocritical, cynical, and, to borrow their term, "wicked."


USE AND ABUSE

Any rational solution to this situation requires the distinction between use and abuse.

Social use implies that the self-medicator knows what she/he is doing and weaves the ingestion into a planful, productive, rewarding lifestyle. Social drinking is a classic example. Reactions to psychoactive foods and drugs are strongly overdetermined by set and setting. In other words, mind state and environment determine what happens. In supportive, low-stress social settings, 90 percent of adults use normal doses of psychoactive substances with positive results. This is as true for illegal drugs as for legal drugs like alcohol. Common-sense education about set and setting eliminates 90 percent of the problems.

As wise societies throughout history have known, people have to be trained in the use of mind changers. “Safe drug use” is a common-sense truism now accepted by the alcohol industry. “Harm-reduction” is a current (1993) term for minimizing a drug’s dangers by having knowledge of such things as purity and proper dosage level.

THE SOLUTION TO DRUG ABUSE

Image

Drug addicts are a special category. About 10 percent of any population is physiologically unable to handle certain stimulants. Diabetics must say “know” to the ingestion of sugar or glucose substances, regardless of peer pressure.

Responsible education would prepare people to recognize the signs of addiction. Addicts are sick, bored people. Therapeutic intervention and immediate treatment are called for. Although counseling may comfort and rehabilitate, the specific treatment of addiction is chemical. Counseling does not prevent diabetes. Insulin does. Hospitals and clinics do not cure tuberculosis. Antibiotics do.

Researchers have located several promising compounds that inhibit addictive behavior. Addiction to cocaine and heroin could be cured in two years if normal medical research replaced the moralistic attitude of the government In addition, private pharmaceutical firms should be encouraged to develop mood changers that are safe, nonaddictive, and precise in their effects.

Inner-city drug addiction and trafficking presents a catastrophic problem. There are two causes:

1. poverty and despair, and

2. the enormous profits created by criminalization. The solution is not to hire more “cossacks” and throw more youths in prison. The solution is to eliminate the poverty-despair, and to eliminate the profits.

Under no circumstances should drug use by minors be condoned; yet responsibility for their care and education should be undertaken by family members, peers, and honest educators-not by the government or the police, and not with propaganda and hypocritical pieties.


Image
vic keller

The former will lake years and much money. The latter can be accomplished in one week. Decriminalize, regulate, tax. With one stroke of the pen, President Clinton can put the cartel gangsters out of the picture, thus saving $8 billion in prosecution costs and diverting their $150 billion annual profits to legal enterprises that can be regulated, controlled, and supervised.

Under no circumstances should drug use by minors be condoned; yet responsibility for their care and education should be undertaken by family members, peers, and honest educators—not by the government or the police, and not with propaganda and hypocritical pieties.

Image

The only catch is this. With the Cold War over and the War on Drugs peacefully ended, upon whom will the puritans wage their next Holy War?


America’s love festwith drugs presents a tremendous challenge to liberal society. Essentially, we are engaged in a Civil War, testing whether our nation—conceived in liberty and dedicated to the ideals of civil society and individual rights—can endure. This is an uncivilized war, a test of whether common sense, compassion, civic understanding, and tolerance of difference can keep us from becoming a divided nation with one-quarter screaming “No!”; one-quarter fighting to keep their opinions heard at all; and half too stoned on narcotic prime-time TV to care what is happening in their own neighbourhood, much less in the neighbouring inner city.

The only catch is this. With the Cold War over and the War on Drugs peacefully ended, upon whom will the puritans wage their next Holy War?

IV.5. MDMA: The Drug of the 1980s

Image
COURTESY BRUCE EISNER

Let's face it, we're talking about an elitist experience. MDMA is a drug that is known by word of mouth to sophisticated people who sincerely want to attain a high level of self-understanding and empathy. We're talking about dedicated searchers who've earned a bit of Ecstasy...


Sociologists tell us that every stage of human culture produces its own art, its own music, its own literary mode, its own sexual style, its own unique slang, and its own ceremonial drug.

Take the 1980s, for example. The style of this decade comes from our leader, Ronald Reagan, who has given us an inhibited sexual style, a nostalgic 'fifties aesthetic, a series of Moral-Majority witchhunts as public sport, a gloomy Cold-War paranoia, and an uncharitable ethic of corporate selfishness.

As an antidote, this decade of harsh rhetoric has witnessed a new type of drug called empathogen, referring to a state of clear empathy and compassionate understanding activated in the user's brain. [Later, the terms "entactogens" or "touching within" also came into favor—Ed]

An earlier version of this drug was MDA—the "love drug" of the 1970s. The best-known current version is a rather more refined and shorter-acting analogue of the MDA family known as MDMA, Ecstasy, XTC, X, Adam, Venus, or Zen.

Dozens of researchers have described feelings of profound well-being, insight, understanding, empathy, and ease of communication that are activated by MDMA. Claudio Naranjo, the distinguished Chilean psychologist, has published this report on the very similar effects of MDA:

The MDA peak experience is typically one in which the moment that is being lived becomes intensely gratifying in all its circumstantial reality... The dominant feeling is of calm and serenity, love as it were, embedded in calm.

The perception of things and people is not altered; lives are held in abeyance and replaced by unconditional acceptance. This is much like Nietzsche's amor fati—love of fate, love of one's particular circumstances.

—The Healing Journey, 1976.


A SENSUAL APHRODISIAC

The eminent Cornell psychopharmacologist Thomas Pynchon suggests that "the circuits of the brain which mediate alarm, fear, flight, fight, lust, and territorial paranoia are temporarily disconnected. You see everything with total clarity undistorted by animalistic urges. You have reached a state which the ancients have called Nirvana, all-seeing bliss."

The effects generally peak after a couple of hours and last around five hours; there is no distortion of reality, and you can—if you have to—perform normal functions. But you don't want to. Who'd want to play tennis or drive a car when you're sitting on the mountain of blissful wisdom?

THE DANGERS OF ECSTASY

The experienced person, hearing of a drug described with such pushing superlatives, is led to inquire: Come on, what are the drawbacks?

Clinical reports suggest that around 25 percent of first-time users experience a brief period of mild nausea, jaw-clenching, or eye wiggle, before passing Go and proceeding to Nirvana.

Image
ecstasy, by Bruce Eisner
MARK FRANKLYN


The experience is so powerful that everyone feels a bit drained the next day. Most users take the drug in the afternoon and by midnight are ready for a wonderful refreshing sleep, preferably in the arms of a loved one.

MDMA is not a genital aphrodisiac. The extraordinary sensuality of the experience is generalized over the body.

LEGALITY

At the present time, MDMA and similar drugs are legal. Why? Because there are no cases of abuse. The drug is not addictive; it doesn't distort reality or lead to antisocial or destructive behavior. There has never been a recorded case of a bad trip. [By 1986, MDMA was classified as a Schedule I drug, and all research was halted, despite an enormous lobbying effort by therapists who had achieved good results with the substance, and against the recommendation of the federal judge who heard the voluminous testimony: By 1994, a small number of bad trips had been reported, usually resulting from excessive use, impurity of substance, or dehydration . —Ed.]

One reason for the positive response to MDMA is consumer expectation. Its word-of-mouth reputation emphasizes love and peace. If you're a belligerent biker or a bar-room rowdy itching for a fight, the last drug you'd take is MDMA.

...► If you want this experience, start hanging around smart, spiritually ambitious people who exhibit in their behavior the qualities that the drug promises. Even if you aren't interested in the MDMA, you could do worse than be on the lookout for people and places that give off that glow.


And since our brain-marriage in 1978, we have watched dozens of our friends share the experience. It's a 90 percent success rate, if taken with the right motives in the right place. [MDMA] surely does help things along if you sincerely want to get there. And you must take it with someone you want to love.


A TYPICAL ECSTASY EXPERIENCE

In the fall of 1978 my wife Barbara and I were visiting New York City. We had cocktails one evening with a friend named Brian, who told us of this wonderful "love drug." He gave us a few tabs. Now I must add, Brian was not a dealer hanging around dark alleys pushing dope. He was a well-known psychologist using MDMA in his psychotherapy practice. He advised us to take the drug on an empty stomach and no alcohol.

Three hours later, Barbara and I had just tipsily finished a gourmet dinner at the 5-star restaurant, Chez Estuvay—cocktails, wine, brandy, cordon-bleu, and all. Feeling mellow, Barbara looked at me with that "let's do it, baby" twinkle in her eye. What could I do? The greatest successes in my life have come from saying yes to Barbara's invitations.

We each dropped one tab. About a half hour rolled by. Zap!

Barbara looked at me and laughed. "You're so lucky," she sighed. "It always hits you first."

Before long I was feeling better than I'd ever felt in my life (and I've had some pretty good times). Barbara was coming on to the same exquisite sensations. Without a second's delay we stripped off our clothes and hit the bed. I lay on my back. Barbara sat on top of me, her head and chest next to mine. Our bodies were glowing. A film of scented moisture, like the sheen of a lotus blossom, covered our skin.

We looked into each other's eyes and smiled. This was it. We both understood everything. All our defenses, protections, and emotional habits were suspended. We realized joyfully how perfect we were designed to be. Apparently the only thing to do was caress each other.

The experience went on and on. When we started to come down after three hours, we took another hit. Funny things happened. We chatted away like newborn Buddhas just down from heaven. The next day we flew back to Hollywood. Three days later we were married.

Here the cynical observer says, "So you had to take more Ecstasy to get back to that narcotic state of bliss."

Nope. That's not the way it works. The drug seems to activate the empathy-clarity circuit in the brain. Once it's turned on, it stays operative. It's like booting up your home computer.

Barbara and I have taken MDMA around twelve times in the past six years. We can return to that blessed state of fusion without the drug—by lying close to each other or by looking at each other in a serene environment.

And since our brain-marriage in 1978, we have watched dozens of our friends share the experience. It's a 90 percent success rate, if taken with the right motives in the right place. It surely does help things along if you sincerely want to get there. And you must take it with someone you want to love.

Ecstasy is not a party stimulant. It's not a recreational hit. It's not a street drug. [Ecstasy became, in fact, all these things for a segment of users once it was outlawed and available only from underground chemists. It became a staple of rave culture by the late 1980s in Texas and the U.K., spreading soon after to Europe and the U.S.— Ed.]

"INSTANT-MARRIAGE SYNDROME"

In the past six years we have heard many enthusiastic reports of MDMA experiences from high places around the country: Manhattan and Maui, San Francisco and Santa Fe, Austin and Ann Arbor, etc. Many New-Age psychologists use MDMA with their clients. After all, calm clarity is the aim of any program of self-improvement. The drug seems to especially benefit victims of trauma and people in relationship therapy.

One new "problem" has emerged: the Ecstasy instant-marriage syndrome.

Lots of people who didn't know each other very well have shared the experience, activated the love-empathy circuits, and rushed off the next day to get married. In some cases, after the rose-coloured smoke cleared, the couple realized that although they did, for a while, share the highest region of love, the practical aspects of their life were not in sync. You might say it's a cosmic summer romance.

Image
ANDY FRITH

It got so bad in Boulder, Colorado, that bumper stickers and T-shirts were printed with the message:

"DON'T GET MARRIED FOR 6 WEEKS AFTER ECSTASY."

The basic rule of neurological common sense applies. Don't take any drug unless you know, trust, and admire the person providing it. There's little chance that you can get your hands on MDMA through the usual channels of drug distribution. Colombian gangsters and Mafia pushers aren't interested in selling a love-peace-wisdom drug.

Let's face it, we're talking about an elitist experience. MDMA is a drug that is known by word of mouth to sophisticated people who sincerely want to attain a high level of self-understanding and empathy. We're talking about dedicated searchers who've earned a bit of Ecstasy. If you want this experience, start hanging around smart, spiritually ambitious people who exhibit in their behavior the qualities that the drug promises. Even if you aren't interested in the MDMA, you could do worse than be on the lookout for people and places that give off that glow.

[Editor's Note: For a fuller description of MDMA and its subsequent history, see

• Bruce Eisner, Ecstasy: The MDMA Story;

• Alexander and Ann Shulgin, PIHKAL (Phenethylamines I Have Known and Loved); or

• Nicolas Saunders, E for Ecstasy.]

IV.6. The Case for Intelligent Drug Use

MACLEAN'S: Why did LSD become so popular in the 1960s? Was it because of the times, or did the drug act as a catalyst to speed the process of cultural change and its own acceptance?

LEARY: The demographic situation was that you had 76 million baby-boomers in the U.S.A. who happened to be the first members of the information society. And you had Marshall McLuhan, television, and the beginning of computer technology. The use of drugs, which are brain-change instruments, perfectly synchronized with home appliances like television, stereo players, and, later, computers. McLuhan forecast this. Drugs that alter states of consciousness are naturally going to be an integral part of an information-intelligence-knowledge society.

The drugs did not cause the cultural change but they were an inevitable byproduct of it And it is no accident that I am now inundated by requests from computer companies to act as a consultant The younger generation involved in computer technologies recognizes the positive aspects of the consciousness movement of the 1960s and sees me sympathetically.

The use of drugs, which are brain-change instruments, perfectly synchronized with home appliances like television, stereo players, and, later, computers. Drugs that alter states of consciousness are naturally going to be an integral part of an information-intelligence-knowledge society.


MACLEAN'S: How do you explain the decline in the use of LSD. Is it not a dead drug?

LEARY: Actually, police seizures of LSD have gone up 1,000 percent in Los Angeles County in the past year. But there had been a downward trend, and I applauded it. In the 1960s and 1970s there were seven million people taking it, but there was not always good LSD available, and bad LSD is a pharmaceutical disaster, so it was realistic to back away. The LSD that is around now is much purer and packaged in smaller doses.

MACLEAN'S: What do these changes indicate?

LEARY: That people are more concerned about the practicalities of their lives and less with philosophic meaning. There are times when it is good to scan and scope widely, and there are times when it is necessary and appropriate to fine-tune and become more practical. In pharmacology there has been a tremendous development of new drugs—MDMA, for example—that has enormous vogue in intelligence- increased circles.

I am 100 percent in favor of the intelligent use of drugs, and 1,000 percent against the thoughtless use of them, whether caffeine or LSD. And drugs are not central to my life.

Image

MACLEAN'S: How does MDMA affect a person?

LEARY: It does not provoke the quick reality change, the hallucinatory Niagara of perspectives of LSD. This drug and its analogues give a very clear, quite deeply affectionate experience.

MACLEAN'S: Does the renaissance of psychedelic drugs signal an eventual return to a time when people will become more inner-directed? Are we going in cycles?

LEARY: Not cycles, predictable stages. It is predictable that the first wave of baby-boomers is now getting into positions of responsibility in laboratories and research centers. It is inevitable that they would bring back research on improved psychoactive drugs. It is archaic and barbaric to be limiting ourselves to alcohol and cocaine. We are going to have entirely new families of drugs, which will have the best aspects of the earlier generation but with improvements in safety and precision.

MACLEAN'S: With all the negative publicity on the use of drugs, have you changed your position on the use of any of them?

LEARY: I am continually experimenting. For example, I was off caffeine and now I use it selectively. The same with other drugs. I am much more selective and precise and intelligent in the timing of how, why, and when I use a drug. I am 100 percent in favor of the intelligent use of drugs, and 1,000 percent against the thoughtless use of them, whether caffeine or LSD. And drugs are not central to my life.
admin
Site Admin
 
Posts: 36135
Joined: Thu Aug 01, 2013 5:21 am

Re: Chaos & Cyberculture, by Timothy Leary, Ph.D.

Postby admin » Sat Jun 15, 2019 10:22 am

Part 1 of 2

Image

V. CYBEROTICS
1. Hormone Holocaust
2. In Search of the True Aphrodisiac
3. Operation Sex Change
4. Digital Activation of the Erotic Brain


Image

V.1. Hormone Holocaust

I recall eyeballing with dreamy lasciviousness a Saturday Evening Post (1936) illustration of a young woman swinging on a hammock, her head tossed back in a gesture of innocent merriment, her white dress and lace petticoat pulled up, revealing two inches of milky, white, soft, tender, moist, kissable inner thigh.

The year was 1938. Place: a small town in Western Massachusetts. Cultural background: Irish Catholic. Erotic climate: dry and frigid. Growing up in this chill environment I was taught there was virtue and mortal sin—nothing in between. Good was to think and act like the neighbours, to be proper and decent. Bad? The human body. Any passing reference to sexual functions was very bad. The mention of genital organs was taboo! Erotic feelings—bad. Sexual desire—beyond bad. It was evil!

In my family, morality was administered by my mother and her two spinster sisters. As a youth I became aware of their strange obsession with sexuality. I watched with fascination as they scanned every work of art, every movie, every song, for any signs of what they referred to as “funny business.” And it soon occurred to me—with genetic dismay—that my family, dominated by such anti-sex fervor, was dying out! Of my generation I was the only one to carry the paternal name and one of only two survivors on the maternal side. This realization so disturbed me that I became determined to fight back. As the last remaining life form in my gene pool, I resolved that my family—and by extension, society’s great Anti-Sex Gang—would not gain control over my precious bodily fluids. In short order, I managed to develop an equally sensitive counter-radar system that scanned every word and image in a fervent search for something—anything—mischievous, racy, erotic.

My first experience with erotic literature was provided by the Bible. I would sit poring over Old Testament descriptions of lasciviousness, burningly aware of the fundamentalist erection bulging in my trousers while Mother and aunts beamed approval from the living room, sure that I would become a priest.

Sexual arousal is all in the mind.


Soft-core porn abounded in the 1930s. Endlessly I eyeballed with dreamy lust the Montgomery Ward mail-order catalogue with its pictures of young trollops shamelessly modeling silken underwear. Pert wantons in nylon hose! Housewife harlots in steamy corsets. Voluptuous nymphomaniacs in one-piece bathing suits, crotch panels hugging tightly to the firm, labial curves. Sexual repression had created such a steamy hot-house atmosphere that the slightest spark could produce in me a pulsing flame.

This secret erotic library of my youth taught me a valuable lesson about the thermodynamics of sexual expression and repression. Sexual arousal is all in the mind. The human being comes equipped with sexual organs wired to the brain and booted up by hormones. The hardware is activated by various cues your brain has learned to associate with sexual invitations and availability. These cues, as shared by a particular society, become the pornography of that culture. Each society and each person develops unique trigger stimuli. The stimuli may change from person to culture to time frame. The girl in the hammock who was unbearably erotic to me in the 1930s would leave me yawning today. Even Jerry Falwell would rate the picture wholesome in the context of the 1980s.

Image

I have an innate, physical revulsion to violence. It disturbs me to look at films that involve fighting, gunfire, bloodshed. The Rambo type, to me, is a subhuman monstrosity. Written or graphic expressions that stimulate violent impulses-these are the true obscenities.


But to someone else, in a personally or socially highly repressed environment, the innocent illustration may retain its tang of arousal. The sexual brain is wired to imprint as trigger stimuli any cue that turns you on. In this way, our brains always have the last laugh on the Anti-Sex Gang. The more that political or religious officials censor words and images about sex, the more suggestive and arousing becomes the lightest hint of double entendre, the slightest glimpse of a bodily part.

Or consider a photo of young men wrestling in Olympic competition, bodies locked and straining in muscular embrace. Such clean-cut, athletic activity could, for male homosexuals or certain horny, imaginative young women, became the porn trigger for hormone holocausts.

The prudish Arabs swathe their women in veils, and then writhe with lust at the sight of a bare ankle. Western feminists may wonder why their Islamic sisters put up with this male repression, but the veiled ladies are aware of the allure. I learned this in 1961 when Allen Ginsberg, William S. Burroughs, and I started flirting with a Moroccan singer in a Tangier cafe, and suddenly found ourselves being pulled into enormous, luscious nymphomaniac brown eyes as warm and melting as chocolate-pudding vaginas. I’m talking about two X-rated, hard-core eyeballs whose wet nakedness was demurely veiled by skillfully fluttering eyelids.

Those sexy Italians who grow and blossom in a Vatican-dominated black-robed repressive culture have developed an amazing shorthand for soft porn. Almost every fruit or vegetable, every household appliance—broom, rake, hammer, mop—is endowed with double meaning. Order a zucchini from the waiter in Naples, and a ripple of giggles goes ’round the table. Watch lusty Luigi hold a peach in his hot hand. Observe him slice it open, slowly, slowly. Watch him dreamily extract the stone, lovingly gaze into and then start to lick the pink-scarlet oval indentation! For Luigi, at that moment, no centerfold is as erotic as that hard-core, porno peach!

Pornography, then, is whatever turns you on. The dictionary agrees. Pornography is defined as written, graphic, or other forms of communication intended to excite sexual desires. What could be clearer? Or healthier? I happen to belong to that large percentage of human beings who believe that sexual desire, being the undeniable source of life, is sacred, and that when expressed by those whose motives are reasonably healthy and loving, it creates the highest form of human communication. .And, to complete this confessional, I have an innate, physical revulsion to violence. It disturbs me to look at films that involve fighting, gunfire, bloodshed. The Rambo type, to me, is a subhuman monstrosity. Written or graphic expressions that stimulate violent impulses—these are the true obscenities. And yet these are the expressions that are of no concern to the anti-pom crusaders, the militaristic Hawks, the evangelical Rambos, the Thought Police, and the whole Anti-Sex Gang. It is no coincidence: The Anti-Sexers haven’t the love or the tenderness or the horniness or the balls to appreciate pornography. Violence or sex—it’s one or the other, it seems, and I know where I stand. As Mae West said to the guy with the bulge in his trousers, “Is that a gun in your pocket or are you glad to see me?”

V.2. In search of the True Aphrodisiac

I want a new drug...
One that won't make me nervous, wonderin' what to do...
One that makes me feel like I feel when I'm with you.

-- Huey Lewis and the News


At a very early age, after comparing the rather routine existence of my family with the heroic adventures I read about in books, I concluded that the well-lived life would necessarily involve quests. Grail adventures for fabled goals to save the human race.

During these younger years I dreamed of becoming a warrior, an explorer, a great scientist, a wise sage. During adolescence a new noble challenge emerged.

Sex.

And here I encountered a great and enduring paradox of the human condition (male division). To wit; Although sex was obviously important to a happy life, I did not have perfect control over my erections. Apparently many other males shared this same inefficiency.

The first problem was that the erections came when I couldn’t use them. The terrible embarrassment of the unexpected arousal in social situations. The inability to get up and walk across the room because of that mind-of-his-own down there.

Later came the nervousness of “making out.” The wild excitement of foreplay. The unbuttoning of the bra. The removal of the panties. The wiggling into position in the front seat of the car. Would you believe a rumble seat? The zipper. The arrangement of the contraceptive. The heavy breathing. The anxieties. Do you hear someone coming? The maneuvering for penetration. Whew! What happened to my unit?

This interaction between the willing mind and the willful body suddenly became a most critical issue. And in puritanical 1936, there were no manuals on the care and use of this complex equipment.

I consulted the dictionary and discovered that something called an “aphrodisiac” increased sexual performance. I rushed to the library and consulted every encyclopaedia available. Not a mention of aphrodisiac.

How curious that such an important topic was totally ignored.

Oh well, here was another unexplained, mysterious facet of adult life. Lindbergh could fly the Atlantic. We could put a man on the South Pole. But we couldn’t get control of the most important part of our body. Maybe this was what philosophers meant by the “mind/body problem.” I resolved to file this away for future study.

After I helped win World War II and then dutifully graduated from college, I decided to be a psychologist This seemed to be the key profession. If you could understand your own mind, think clearly, and not be victimized by emotions, you could then master the other issues in life.

By 1950, sex was no problem. I was settled into the suburbs, happily married, and productively domesticated. My erections reported to duty promptly on schedule just as I did at the office.

THE QUEST FOR THE MAGIC POTION GOES TO HARVARD

In 1960, that magic year, I moved to Cambridge, Massachusetts, to join the Harvard faculty. My sexual situation was changed. I was a 40-year-old single person, facing, once again, the thrills, the chills, the spills of the mating ground. At this point I found that my sexuality (how shall I put this?) was very elitist and selective. I no longer felt that incessant, throbbing teenage desire to fuck any consenting warm body in the vicinity. A one-night stand could be a lust or a bust, depending on my feelings toward the woman, my emotional condition, my state of mind, and my period of heat.

Sex means cheerfully giving up control to receive pleasure. The less sex, the more compulsion to control.


Image

To find out more about these matters, I read extensively on the subject and talked to my friends in the psychiatric, clinical, and personality departments. I learned that male sexuality is not an automatic macho scene. The male erotic response turned out to be a most complex, delicate situation. More than two-thirds of the male population over the age of 55 reported less than perfect control over their desire. Adult males seemed to have cycles and rhythms and all sorts of fragile sensitivities that are usually attributed to the “weaker sex.” Scientific observers agreed that most of the guys who claimed total virility were either lying or too primitive and callous to appreciate the exquisite complications of erotic interaction in the fast-moving, ever-changing, postindustrial, interactive civilization.

So here was an interesting social phenomenon. It was generally believed by psychologists back there in 1960 that much of the conflict, aggression, paranoia, and sadism that was plaguing society was due to sexual frustration. Freud started this line of thought. Wilhelm Reich carried it to its logical political conclusion. Sex means cheerfully giving up control to receive pleasure. The less sex, the more compulsion to control.

Take, for example, a control freak like J. Edgar Hoover. Here was a 70-year-old drag-queen who got his FBI kicks from collecting sexual dossiers on rival politicians.

Take, for example, Richard Nixon, whom no one ever accused of tender erotic feelings.

At this time, spring of 1960, I concluded that if a safe, dependable aphrodisiac were available, many of the psychological and social problems facing our species would instantly be ameliorated. So I descended on the Harvard Medical School library with a team of graduate assistants. We scoured the bibliographies and journal files for data about aphrodisiac drugs and discovered an enormous literature on the subject.

The mandrake root was apparently the first sex stimulus. It was mentioned twice in the Bible. Pythagoras “advocated” it Machiavelli wrote a comedy about it.

The flesh and organs of horny animals had been used in almost every time and place. Hippomanes, flesh from the forehead of a colt, was mentioned in Virgil. Mediaeval Europeans regularly used the penis of the stag, bull, ox, goat.

Ambergris, a jelly from the innards of the whale, was used by the royal mistress Madame du Barry and the insatiably curious James Boswell. Musk was a perennial favorite of erotic searchers; so was shellfish, of course, especially oysters and mussels. In Japan, the fugu fish, a form of puffer, is still used by hopeful lovers. Each year more than five hundred Japanese die while on this dangerous quest.

All the texts agreed that cantharides, Spanish Fly, is a “most certain and terrible aphrodisiac.” An overdose causes unbearable itching and irritation to the genitals.

Image
ANDY FRITH

Over the centuries the plant kingdom has been ransacked by the sexually ambitious. Many believe that satyrian, a mythic herb mentioned by the Greeks and Romans, was nothing else than good old marijuana and hashish. Then there’s truffles and mushrooms. The South American yage. The South Seas root kava kava. Damiana. The royal jelly and pollen from bees.

And, of course, the coca plant. Pre-Columbian Peruvian ceramics portrayed pornographic scenes on pots used to prepare the nose candy of the Andes. Is cocaine an aphrodisiac? “First you’re hot and then you’re not,” reported most sophisticated researchers.

Casanova attributed his record-making lust to raw eggs.

The strong, hard, up-jutting horn of the rhino has caught the imagination of erection-seekers for centuries. You grind it up into powder and eat or toot it In the Orient today, rhino dust goes for $2,000 an ounce. In Hong Kong restaurants they’ll sprinkle some rhino-horn powder on your dinner for a hefty addition to your bill.

My research at the Harvard Medical School library thus demonstrated that my quest was not a lonely one. Throughout the ages, intelligent, affluent, ambitious, and just plain horny human beings have continually sought the alchemical grail—the true aphrodisiac.

So what does modern science have to contribute to this noble search? Nothing. Nada. Zilch.

Not only was there no proven aphrodisiac in the current medical literature, there was apparently no research being done on this most important topic. How curious. Here was a medicine that could cure many of our medical and psychological problems, and there seemed to be a veil of secrecy around the subject

When I tried to talk to my friends on the medical faculty about this subject, they clammed up. Finally an endocrinologist pal explained it to me. “Listen, Timothy, the subject of aphrodisiacs is taboo. If any medical scientist or physiologist here, or in the Soviet Union, were to apply for a grant to research this field, his reputation would be ruined. He’d be considered a flake.”
Throughout the ages. intelligent, affluent, ambitious, and just plain horny human beings have continually sought the alchemical grail-the true aphrodisiac.


“But it’s a great research topic,” I protested. “The first scientist who discovers an effective aphrodisiac will be a savior of mankind and make a bundle of money.”

“No question of it,” said the endocrinologist. “We all know that if a crack team of psychopharmacologists were to research this topic, they could come up with an aphrodisiac in a year. It will happen. Someday someone will win a Nobel prize and make a billion dollars marketing one. But this is only 1958. Eisenhower is president Khrushchev is premier. There’s an overpopulation problem. The culture isn’t ready for a medicine that would have the male population running around with erect dicks bulging out of their pants. Jeez, we’re just coming up with a polio vaccine. Come back in twenty years, and maybe we’ll have an erection injection.”

At this time, spring of 1960, I concluded that if a safe, dependable aphrodisiac were available, many of the psychological and social problems facing our species would instantly be ameliorated.
 

There was no doubt about it. There was a social taboo against the idea of a pill that would give man a calm, certain control over his precious equipment. I couldn’t understand it. If your car decided to run when it wanted to, you’d have it adjusted right away. If your television set was temperamental and turned off at its own whim, you’d take steps to put you back in charge.

This resistance to self-improvement became really obvious when I was taken to see a sex show in the Reeperbahn of Hamburg, Germany. My guides were a very sophisticated editor of Der Speigel and a well-known psychiatrist The show amazed me. Straight-out fucking on stage! I was most impressed by a big Swedish youth who bounded around the set with this enormous hard-on, fucking first this fiery red-head who wrapped her legs around him, and then a sultry brunette who lay on a couch holding up her arms invitingly, and then pleasuring the saucy blonde who bent over, leaning her head against the wall with her backsides wiggling.

Image
vic keller

For twenty minutes this acrobatic young man pranced around with total self-mastery -- in front of an audience of two hundred! We’re talking Olympic gold-medal time!

“That guy’s stamina is impressive,” I said to my German hosts. They scoffed in that scornful, jaded Hamburg style.

“That’s not the real thing,” said the editor. “He’s taken some drug.”

The psychiatrist agreed, waving his hand in dismissal.  

I leaped to my feet “What drug!” I shouted. “What’s it called? Where can you get it?”

No answer from my sophisticated friends. They just couldn’t admit to being interested.

THE APHRODISIAC EFFECT OF PSYCHEDELIC DRUGS

Image

In August 1960, beside a swimming pool in Mexico, I ate psilocybin mushrooms and discovered the power of psychedelic drugs to reprogram the brain.

I rushed back to Harvard. Frank Barron and I started the Harvard Psychedelic Drug Research project. Aldous Huxley and Alan Watts and Allen Ginsberg were our advisors. We assembled thirty of the brightest young researchers in the area. We were on to something that could change human nature. We felt like Oppenheimer after his Almagordo bomb, except better, because psychedelic drugs allowed you to release the nuclear energies inside your own head.

In the next two years the Harvard Psychedelic Drug Research project studied the reactions of a thousand subjects to LSD. We discovered that the key to a psychedelic drug session is set and setting.

Set is your mind fix. Your psychological state. Be very careful what you want from a session, because you’re likely to get it.

Setting is the environment. If your surroundings are scary, then you’ll be scared. If your surroundings are beautiful, then you’ll have a beautiful experience.

Our sessions at Harvard were designed for self-discovery. The sessions were held in groups. So neither the set nor the setting emphasized sex.

My colleague Richard Alpert, who later became the famous holy man Baba Ram Dass, was much more hip. He quickly discovered that if the set (and expectation) was erotic, and the setting was his bedroom, then psychedelic drugs were powerfully aphrodisiac. I give the wily Ram Dass a lot of credit for this breakthrough. He was certainly way ahead of me.

MANDRAKE ROOT
HIPPOMANES
STAG PENIS
AMBERGRIS
MUSK
OYSTERS
BULL PENIS
MUSSELS
FUGU FISH
CANTHARIDES
OX PENIS
SATYRIAN
MARIJUANA & HASHISH
HORSE PENIS
TRUFFLES
KAVA KAVA
COCA
GOAT PENIS
RAW EGGS
RHINO HORN
YOHIMBE
MANDRAKE ROOT
HIPPOMANES
STAG PENIS
AMBERGRIS
MUSK
OYSTERS
HORSE PENIS
MUSSELS
FUGU FISH
CANTHARIDES
OX PENIS
SATYRIAN
MARIJUANA & HASHISH
BULL PENIS
HASHISH
TRUFFLES
KAVA KAVA
COCA
GOAT PENIS
RAW EGGS
RHINO HORN
YOHIMBE
MANDRAKE ROOT
HIPPOMANES
STAG PENIS
AMBERGRIS
MUSK
OYSTERS
BULL PENIS
MUSSELS
FUGU FISH
CANTHARIDES
OX PENIS
SATYRIAN
MARIJUANA & HASHISH


Baba Ram Dass: "All this inner exploration stuff is great. It’s true you can access any circuit in your brain and change your mind. But it's time you faced the facts, Timothy. We're turning on the most powerful sexual organ in the universe! The brain."


I remember the day he came to me and said, “All this inner exploration stuff is great It’s true you can access any circuit in your brain and change your mind. But it’s time you faced the facts, Timothy. We’re turning on the most powerful sexual organ in the universe! The brain.”

Other sophisticated people came to Harvard and tipped us to the secret The philosopher Gerald Heard. The beat poet Allen Ginsberg. The Buddhist sage Alan Watts. The western folk hero Neil Cassady. We were just rediscovering what philosophers and poets and mystics and musicians and hedonists had known for centuries. Marijuana, hashish, mushrooms, LSD were powerful sensory experiences.

For the next twenty years, like everyone else, I multiplied my sensory pleasure, learned the techniques of erotic engineering. Everything became a source of aesthetic-erotic pleasure, etc. The effect was in the head. If you knew how to dial and tune your brain, you could enrich your sex life beyond your wildest dreams.

But there was still that matter of controlling the rod of flesh. We could boogie around in our brains. Good! But why couldn’t a man be able to operate his penis at will the way he moves the voluntary organs of his body?

A RISKY ENCOUNTER WITH MEDICAL SCIENCE

One night in 1983, I was having dinner with a friend who worked at the UCLA Neuropsychiatric Institute. During the evening, he mentioned that a breakthrough in the erection department was at hand. He said that a Stanford University research team was developing a pill that would give immediate control of your erections! The active ingredient was called yohimbe.

This was a discovery of historic importance! It could mean the end of male insecurity, cruelty, and war! This could break the wretched addiction to prime-time television!

My friend also said that a local group, the Southern California Sexual Dysfunction Clinic, was giving these new pills to research subjects. I phoned and made an appointment with the director. If the pill existed, I wanted to try it out, and help make it available to the public.

The clinic was in the Cedar Sinai Medical Center. There was a large waiting room. About eight very old men were sitting slumped over, staring glumly at the carpet. A couple had crutches.

Two old geezers were drooling.

The nurse greeted me cordially and asked me to fill out a form. I said, “I’m here to discuss research on aphrodisiacs with the doctor.” She smiled compassionately and said she understood, but would I please fill out the forms. So I did.

After a while a male technician, about 40, with the graceful charm of a chic hair-dresser, asked me to come to a back room. I explained that I wanted to discuss research with the doctor. He smiled understanding^ and asked me to take some tests. At this point I was about to say “forget it,” but it occurred to me that this would be a great opportunity see what happens in these frontiers of medical science. And I realized that the doctor wasn’t going to give me pills until I had taken the tests.

So I took the standard blood and urine tests.

Then came the mad-scientist stuff. The technician patiently explained that we had to find out if there was a strong and steady flow of blood to my unit So he wired the tip of my module, the base of my module, and an artery in my leg to an amplifier and we sat back to listen. BOOM... BOOM... BOOM! My genital bloodstream filled the room with its strong stallion pulse! Sounded like the rhythm section of a heavy-metal rock group to me.

The technician nodded in approval.

Next he had me jog in place, my unit still wired for sound. The percussion section really took off. Boom... da... BOOM!

All the time I kept explaining that I had regular, if unpredictable erections. I just wanted the pill! The technician was very understanding. “Tell it to the doctor,” he said.

The doc was very cordial and understanding. He evaded my questions about the aphrodisiac. He explained how complicated this field was—the mind, the brain, the hormones, the circulatory system, phobias, repressions, venereal diseases, herpes, AIDS, alcohol and drug abuse, fatigue, overwork, marital discord, inherited dispositions, early traumas, fetishes, anxieties, menopausal life stages.

At this point it dawned on me that this clinic, supposedly set up to deal with sexual arousal, was the most antiseptic, mechanical, unerotic place I had ever encountered. I could feel my reservoir of sexual desire rapidly draining away. If I didn’t have an erection problem before, I was very likely to catch one in here. This place could make Casanova take a vow of chastity.

I felt like the ambitious starlet who undressed for the producer, the casting director, the scriptwriter, the director, the director’s brother Max, and won a part in a safari movie that required her to live in a tent on the wind-swept, dismal Sahara desert. “Who do I have to fuck to get out of this sexual-dysfunction movie?” I thought to myself.

The doctor was relentless. He insisted that I take the erection-frequency test You took the gadget home and wired up your module during sleep to measure the number and strength of nocturnal hard-ons. I explained that I had them all the time. “Listen, just phone my wife. She takes Richter-scale readings every night.”

The male nurse outfitted me with the peter-meter, stored for travel in a large suitcase. All the old men in the waiting room looked up sadly as I bounced by with the case.

My wife was intrigued. She couldn’t wait for me to try it. We rushed to the bedroom and set it up by the side of the bed. Velcro straps, wires hooked to dials, clocks, and meters. It was so science-fiction sexy that, in spite of myself, I got an erection. My wife applauded.

“That gadget is wonderful!” she marveled.

“Hey, look out,” I shouted. “You’ll ruin the experiment.”

“Fabulous,” murmured my wife.

“Hey,” I worried, “everything we’re doing is being recorded!”

“Three cheers for science,” said my wife.

Well, we broke the machine. Wires pulled off. A cable apparently short-circuited. The clock motor heaved a buzzing sigh and stopped. All the meters went over the red, flickered, and came to a satiated rest.

“Fabulous,” I said.

Next Monday I returned the destroyed gadget. I felt very guilty. I tried to explain what had happened to the technician. He gave me a stern look. When I asked about the aphrodisiac pill, he made an appointment for me to see the doctor.

Everything became a source of aesthetic-erotic pleasure, etc. The effect was in the head. If you knew how to dial and tune your brain. you could enrich your sex life beyond your wildest dreams.


That weekend my wife and I took some mushrooms and had a wonderful time. On Monday morning I reported for my interview with the doctor.

The old men were still in the waiting room. I raced back to see the male nurse and told him about the great sex party over the weekend. He looked at me coldly.

I told the doctor about the wonderful effects of the psychedelic. He seemed unimpressed. I asked him for the aphrodisiac pill once again. He flatly denied that such a potion existed. His position was clear. If you didn’t have a circulatory problem that could be treated by normal medicine, your penile control and enhancement program was to be handled by a shrink, or your rabbi, priest, or minister.

A THRILLING BREAKTHROUGH IN MEDICAL SCIENCE

Image

It was August 1984 when the news we had been awaiting for hit the wires. Physiologists at Stanford University made it official. They had developed a potent aphrodisiac. The potion was extracted from the bark of the yohimbe tree of tropical West Africa. Tests on laboratory rats proved “sensational.” It seemed that the surprised and delighted rodents produced fifty erections an hour. Fifty times more than normal!

The researchers announced that they were ready to begin testing the drug on humans. The news flash stirred up the predictable enthusiastic response. A spokesperson at the Stanford Medical News Bureau reported that the item had “been accorded a good deal more space and time than most of the bureau’s reports on medical progress.”

The expected puritan reaction was not long in coming. One Daniel S. Greenberg, publisher of Science and Government Report, complained that “in terms of science’s traditional quest for fundamental understanding, yohimbe research is pretty thin stuff.” Mr. Greenberg prudishly asserted that this interest in happiness was a sign of passion, vanity, and self-indulgence—as opposed to a space shot to study the surface of Mars. The essay was widely reprinted— even in the staid Los Angeles Times. The purpose of the piece was to ridicule the research and discourage its continuation.

The politics of senility prevailed once again. If any scientific commission recommended funding for aphrodisiac research, it would be opposed by the Moral Majority and the right-wing politicians. If a large pharmaceutical house tried to market a sexual-enhancement drug—imagine the furor! The moralists would have another sin to denounce! Laws would be passed! The narcotic agencies would have another victimless crime to persecute.

Imagine the black market that will spring up. College campuses. Yuppie parties. Even the senior citizens’ centers would be buzzing. A new drug underground? What normal, healthy person would not want to try a new love potion?

I told the doctor about the wonderful effects of the psychedelic. He seemed unimpressed. I asked him for the aphrodisiac pill once again. He flatly denied that such a potion existed. His position was clear. If you didn’t have a circulatory problem that could be treated by normal medicine, your penile control and enhancement program was to be handled by a shrink, or your rabbi, priest, or minister.... What normal, healthy person would not want to try a new love potion?


Image

My wife was intrigued. She couldn't wait for me to try it.
We rushed to the bedroom and set it up by the side of the bed.
Velcro straps, wires hooked to dials, clocks, and meters.
It was so science-fiction sexy that, in spite of myself, I got an erection.
My wife applauded.


V.3. Operation Sex Change

Do you want to be the center of attention at your next party—without disrobing or throwing up on the hostess? Here's a sure-fire tip. Turn to the person sitting next to you and ask this question; "Do you think America has undergone a change in sexual morals during the last five years?"

Almost everyone in a reasonable state of mental alertness will respond with some emotion. Most will say “Yes!" Some will say, "It depends." But everyone has an opinion. If you ask enough people, you'll get some thought-provoking answers.


WHAT HAPPENED TO THE GOOD OLD-FASHIONED SUBURBAN ORGY?

My ultra-jaded friend Larry Flynt, a one-time Olympic erotic athlete, groaned when I popped him the “sex-change” question. “What happened to sexual freedom and the open marriage?” he complained. “I remember this party in Atlanta around 1972. I walked into this large house and there were like a hundred (!) men and women, ya know, all nude. Drinking! Talking! Smoking funny cigarettes! Dancing! Flirting!

“And ya know what? They were all there to fuck as many new and different people as the flesh could stand! Hey, I'm speaking about middle-class folks! Lawyers. Dentists. Accountants. And their ever-loving wives! Occasionally a couple or a trio heads for the heated pool or the hot tub or the rumpus room. In every bedroom you got two, three, four couples making out on big round beds. Hey, they’re swapping partners back and forth like elastic orgasms had just come on the market! Jeez, you sure don’t hear of those goings-on today!”

Larry had his own theory to explain the new celibacy.

“Jealousy. Yup! Plain, old-fashioned, male jealousy stopped all the swapping.”

Larry smiled to himself, a real dirty grin, and rubbed his belly and shook his head. “Okay. Imagine Max the dentist. He’s happy as a toothless oyster sucking away at that cute little Georgia Peach married to the insurance agent down the street. And then he looks over and ya know what! There’s his own sweetie-pie wife, her legs planted firmly in the air, merrily boffing some total stranger, a TV weather reporter from Birmingham, Alabama, with a pot-belly and a twelve-inch erection! And what’s worse, she’s got this ecstatic, dazed look on her face!

“Well! Dentist Max freaks out. You gotta be very secure sexually to handle that sort of scene.”

A CONCERN FOR THE PURITY OF OUR PRECIOUS BODILY FLUIDS

Maybe. But most people cite another obvious reason for the new morality. Fear of the new sex-related diseases.

According to Susan, an attractive (one might say voluptuous) psychologist in her thirties, “It started with herpes. Then AIDS put everyone into the diagnostic mode.

“There’s another health-related sex inhibitor. Female contraceptives have been given a very bad press recently.

“Let’s face it,” said Susan, “it was the pill and the IUDs that kicked off the sexual liberation of the late 1960s. But now, many women are having second thoughts about the side effects. What can a horny young woman do? Barrier devices like diaphragms are undignified, and rubbers are crude.”

Susan told a story about Fred, a doctor at her clinic. “He’s a real cute guy. Cool, athletic, charming. Prides himself on being a playboy stud. Now, we’ve been eyeing each other for a long time, and one night after work Fred invites me to his place for a drink. I’m really turned on and thinking some steamy thoughts as we walk into his living room. Well, one thing leads to another—erotic music, drinking margaritas, candle light, smouldering glances, secret little smiles. Fred moves next to me on the deep, soft couch, and begins caressing my neck.

“Oooh! Delicious!

“I relax and shift my weight to be more comfortable. Fred puts his hand on my knee. I open my legs just a little. He slides his hand up my smooth thigh slowly, slowly. I’m about to go crazy, you understand. His hand moves up more and I’m opening my legs wider. One false move and I’m his!

“At this crucial moment Fred starts thinking about his precious bodily fluids. And mine. So he pulls back his hand and clears his throat and initiates the clinical interview. He says, ‘I’ve been tested recently for herpes, AIDS, and VD. Including chlamydia. I’m clean as a bean, Susan. How about you?'"

Susan sighed and shook her head sadly. “Sorta puts a chill on the steamy tropical romantic climate, doesn’t it!”

Image

FRIGHTENING? FRUSTRATING? FADDISH? FRIENDLY?

I’m sitting in the Polo Lounge of the Beverly Hills Hotel, bored with movie talk. So I pop the sex-change question. Works like a charm. Everyone has an emotional reaction.

“It’s frightening,” said June, a liberal lawyer. “It’s part of the Reagan conservatism. These right-wingers want to turn America into a prudish police state like Iran, with all the women in black veils and chastity belts.”

“It’s frustrating,” said Charles, a sturdy, thoughtful aspiring screenwriter who had just moved to Hollywood. “I’m looking for a girlfriend out here, and I can’t score a date. The women seem afraid of human contact. It’s a lot easier to meet girls in Chicago.”

“Shave your beard, sell a script, buy a Porsche. You’ll have no trouble finding girls, believe me,” purred June.

“This new puritanism is a fad,” said Jon Bradshaw, a cynical journalist just in from the Tripoli front. “Morality fluctuates with the economy. When the stock market goes up, skirts rise. When people are worried about money, they fuck less. Period.”

Bradshaw took a long sip from his scotch-rocks, unsheathed his war-correspondent leer, and scoped it in June’s direction. “But I like that stuff about the Ayatollah’s dancing girls with black veils and the belts. Sounds like fun.”

“It’s all about friendship,” said Natalie, a producer’s mistress. “People are definitely less promiscuous these days. Why? Because they want a relationship— not a one-night stand. And you’re more likely to stay healthy and swing a movie deal if you make it with a pal.”

A PASSIONATE ATTACK ON MALE DOMINATION

I continued my research at Oasis, the chic new restaurant in Dallas. Richard Chase, the suave owner, sat me next to Patricia, a beautiful brunette glowing with pregnancy. The sex-change question set her off!

According to Patricia, “Women are more self-confident and assertive these days. The male department just can’t deal with it. I hear it all over Texas from intelligent, beautiful, successful women. It’s these gun-slinging cowboys who are causing the new puritanism. Scared by the competition. Can’t get it up for a self-confident Southern woman.”

A LIMP DEFENSE OF MALE CHASTITY

The guy next to her, a young oil executive named Nick, reacted defensively to this notion. “Men I know are more interested in making money than making a woman. Playing around is high-school and college stuff. When you get out in the real world, you realize that you drill a gal, that’s one-night crude. Make a deal for a pipeline and you got almost tax-free security, assuming you survive OPEC roller-coasters.”

Patricia sniffed with impatience. “What is this grease-rigger talk about drilling a woman, Nick? How about a partnership with an equal?”

“No room on my busy schedule for merger propositions. Have your lawyer ring mine, and maybe we can set up a conference call,” said Nick with a nervous laugh.

MEN WHO MAKE WAR, NOT LOVE -- ARE THEY THE PROBLEM?

This really provoked Patricia. “For thousands of years power has been monopolized by men who hate women. These sexists can’t stand the idea that women are smarter, nicer, more loving, more beautiful than men. So they form these men’s-club religions that put women down. Judaism. Christianity. Islam. They all treat women as slaves, property, serfs, assistants to the boss. Women can’t play any active role in the ceremonies or the politics.

“Boy, y’all get out there and lasso a purty gal and brand her and stick her in the breeding barn with a copy of the Bible to comfort her. You know how it says: The Lord is my shepherd! He maketh me lie down in green pastures! The Lord strokes mah big udders. Oh praise the Lord, cause he spraids mah laigs. He knocks me up. Glory be!

“Male monotheism! You know what that means? One God. Whose God? My God! And guess what! He’s a man! A totalitarian, all-powerful, bad-tempered male. All the Bibles, Korans, Talmuds agree this big numero-uno God is of the male gender.

“And, let’s face it. This big-shot Allah may own the oil fields of the Middle East, but he’s a bad-ass Persian! The last guy you’d want to have a date with. I, for one, wouldn’t go on that Mohammed’s yacht, would you?

“And, to be fair about it, how about our pal Jehovah? Who in their right mind would want Him to move into the house next door, issuing commands and ruining property values by causing floods and turning people’s wives to salt?”

At this point Nick wiped his brow with a napkin. I did too. Nick looked at his watch.

There was no stopping Patricia. She was on a roll. “Notice that in all these fundamentalist sects, the mullahs and the rabbis and the priests actually keep the women out of sight, behind veils, or barefoot in the kitchen, or in the balcony of the synagogue, or in the nunnery.”

At this point Nick got up and tottered off from the table.

Patricia didn’t miss a beat.

“These religious men are so threatened by women that they grab swords, flags, crosses, guns, power, uniforms, anything that will make them feel adequate. They make war because they’re afraid to make love.”

The two other Texas ladies at the table seemed fascinated by this stuff, their eyes bulging, their pretty heads nodding in agreement Me, I’m listening and taking notes on an Oasis linen napkin.

Image Image
 
"These religious men are so threatened by women that they grab swords, flags, crosses, guns, power, uniforms, anything that will make them feel adequate. They make war because they're afraid to make love.”


The hippies represented a feminization, a sensitization of consciousness, a gentle, erotic mellowing


WHAT ABOUT THE SEX CHANGES OF THE 1960s?

“But weren’t things different ten years ago?” I inquired of Patricia.

“You better believe it, Doc,” said Patricia. “There was that one amazing fourteen-year period between 1966 and 1980 when four thousand years of male domination were briefly overthrown. The key to this ’sixties cultural revolution was women’s liberation! The hippies represented a feminization, a sensitization of consciousness, a gentle, erotic mellowing. The hippies totally ridiculed the male power structures just by grinning at the cops.

“Here, 1986, in Rambo-Reagan America, it’s hard to remember that back there in 1972, Vietnam soldiers were ashamed to wear their uniforms in public. The Texas Rangers freaked out because their swaggering authority was being ignored. The draft and the drug laws were publicly defied. Male politicians and moralists went crazy, warning about Western civilization collapsing before this wave of paganism and hedonism and wild, bra-less feminism. It was a feisty woman, Martha Mitchell, who first blew the whistle on the Nixon Watergate cover-up.

“Remember long hair? Long hair on Texas dudes! That started the country-rock scene at the Armadillo in Austin, Texas. What did that long hair mean? Men accepting feminine erotic power. Remember that cop in Houston who requested permission to grow his hair long so that he could relate to members of the opposite sex—namely, his wife?

“It was the women who made all this ’sixties stuff happen. The sexual freedom was really women’s freedom. God knows the men didn’t need liberation. The Judaeo-Christian-Moslem double standard always let Texan men do what they wanted.

“I don’t know what it was like up North, honey, but down here in Texas ’round 1969, women suddenly understood that they were free to fuck whom-so-ever they wanted and how-some-ever they wanted. It was the women who learned about slow, serpentine, Hindu, fuck-me-Buddha sexuality.

“Yup, it was the cowgirls who demanded some variation on the missionary position. And gently pulled the heads of their astonished boyfriends down to the promised land and taught white lads how to make girls feel good.

“And it was the women who demanded the new aphrodisiac drugs from their guys. Don’t you remember the motto of the Hippie Girl from Galveston? Keep me high, Long Horn, and I’ll ball you all night long.”
admin
Site Admin
 
Posts: 36135
Joined: Thu Aug 01, 2013 5:21 am

Re: Chaos & Cyberculture, by Timothy Leary, Ph.D.

Postby admin » Sat Jun 15, 2019 10:23 am

Part 2 of 2

BUT WHAT HAPPENED TO THE SEXUAL LIBERATION OF THE 1960s?

Patricia looked at me, shook her head, and sighed. “Don’t you get the point? It wasn’t ‘sexual liberation,’ it was freedom for the two groups who were repressed by the male morality. First it was the women who took off their aprons and came out of the kitchens. Then it was the gays who came out of the closets, insisting that sex be beautiful and elegant and long and slow and graceful and funny. Mr. Redneck Macho from Fort Worth had to change his heavy-breathing, bar-room, slam-bam, steer-bull ways, and learn how to boogie and ball and fool around and be sweet and tender with his big red chap-stick.

“The Texas A&.M co-ed looks at the guy and says, ‘Is that a stupid jive-ass Colt 45 in your pocket, John Wayne, or have you suddenly learned how to express affection to a girl?’ Hey, Buck, the penis is not a Bowie knife to be plunged into the gaping wounds of your prostrate victims! The penis is a shaft of pleasure and delightful fusion.

Image
DANA GLUCKSTEIN

“What’s changed from the 1960s is this: Smart, self-confident women, after listening to Mick Jagger and Jimi Hendrix and Willie Nelson, weren’t gonna go back to lying down meekly, spreading their legs anytime some Rice University frat-kid decided he wanted to get his rocks off.

“No way, Don Jose. Smart women, like that lil' ole Jerry Hall, learned to be selective and more demanding. Today, women talk about the men they know and compare them for size and fit and performance and wit and charm. And wow! Does that threaten the SMU business-administration majors! No wonder poor Nick tottered off to the, excuse the expression, men’s room a few minutes ago.”

The three women at the table looked at each other and smiled in some sort of secret agreement.

SCIENTIFIC POLL REVEALS DIFFERENCE BETWEEN MEN AND WOMEN

My head spinning from Patricia’s unorthodox theories, I phoned the research department and requested some hard data.

A diligent scan of the scientific literature revealed that in 1984, Newsweek polled students at ninety-eight campuses to find out if morals were changing. The major results: “Students are against casual sex, for fidelity in marriage, and split on the question of living together.”

According to Newsweek, “The real legacy of the sexual revolution—and perhaps the women’s movement as well—may lie in how men and women think about each other. Six out of ten say there are significant differences in the ways men and women think.”

Confirming Patricia’s cocky views, 24 percent of women believed that females are more intelligent than males! And only 6 percent thought men were smarter.

"That’s what happening by God! Monogamous relationships! People are staying home with their mates. Or it you don't have a steady, then you stay home alone and watch Dynasty.”


MACHO MEN LOSING OUT TO THE GAYS?

Patricia and other sophisticated women I interviewed kept making the point that today, during this confusing time of shifting sex roles, they feel more comfortable with gays.

I asked Julia Andrews, a successful geologist from Boulder, about this, and she came up with a word that I was to hear more and more as I researched the sex-change issue.

The word is friendship. Many women complain that it’s almost impossible to maintain a friendship with a straight guy whom you don’t want to fuck. Back in the 1950s men hung out with and enjoyed the company of other men, talking about sports, hunting, careers, entertainment, business, politics. And in the old days, women busied themselves with cooking, washing, aesthetics, fashion, families, and the softer human interests. Men and women lived in different worlds.

According to Julia, “All this has changed. Many intelligent, educated, alert women these days are equally interested in careers, political issues, IRAs, adult-education courses, and prime rates. Of course, they’re still into fashion and elegance and high culture; so they’re looking for wide- gauge men who can share their full-spectrum interests. And a lot of men just won’t get hip.

“That’s where the gays come in. As a group, homosexual men make more money, are better educated, are more sophisticated than straights. They are more open to make friendships with women. They’re more sensitive. And to many of us, sensitive means smarter. Like there’s this professor, Bruce, in my department He’s gay. I have great times with him. We can discuss our research projects. We can gossip about office politics. He knows more than I do about French and Japanese dress designers, and he’s hip on the music and movie scene. He reads cookbooks and understands how erotic eating and food can be. But the main thing is, he’s sensitive to my moods, my little double meanings, my funny little jokes. There’s the added advantage that, with Bruce, there’s no problem about exchanging contaminated metabolic liquids.”

BUT HASN’T THE GAY SEX SCENE COOLED DOWN?

My next expert witness was a wise old closet homosexual. Jack Black is a 55-year-old ordained Episcopalian minister. As it happens, he doesn’t practice his clerical calling. Sensibly enough, he’s a full professor at an Ivy League divinity school. Jack is smart, scholarly, cynical, a skillful politician. He’s got a satirical sense of humour -- dry, desiccated, wizened as a vulture’s claw. At the moment. Jack has mixed feelings about the New Morality.

On the down side, the AIDS epidemic had him crushed. “I can’t believe it,” he moaned. “After thirty years of hiding in the closet, I finally see this wonderful gay-pride thing emerging. Political strength, economic clout, gay churches, gay ministers preaching from pulpits! A real sense of gay power, and then...”

“Have gay morals changed?” I asked.

“Changed! Totally! Facts are, if you cruise the boulevard these days, the chances are 100 percent that you’ll get the virus. Promiscuity is down 80 percent. The bath houses are all closed. The bar traffic is down 40 percent. And the sex practices have changed. Safe sex. People take precautions. No exchange of fluids.”

On the up side, the new celibacy has done wonders for the tranquillity of Jack’s relationship with his gorgeous, 23-year-old, live-in lover. Now that he has become an aging man of the cloth, Jack is vigorously preaching monogamy.

“That’s what happening, by God! Monogamous relationships! People are staying home with their mates. Or if you don’t have a steady, then you stay home alone and watch Dynasty. ”

And here in this biblical context I heard again that label for the new sexuality. Friendship.

“Friendship. Agape. Monastic withdrawal from temptation. Male bonding in the spirit of the twelve apostles. Christian fellowship. Brotherly love. Yes,” said Father Jack quietly, “these days in the gay community you bugger your friend or you don’t fuck at all.”

FAREWELL SEXUAL FREEDOM?

Turning from the holy to the secular side of the debate, I found that Futurist magazine, true to its belief that our future lies ahead of us, has recently offered some sobering predictions about a “New Victorianism.” Editor Edward Cornish expects that the uncontrollable hysteria about herpes and AIDS now sweeping the Midwest and South will lead to a return to romantic love. “Unable to realize their sexual longings, people will do a lot of pining and fantasizing. Popular music will move back to love themes.”

• “Family life will seem safer.”

• “Pornography will become less acceptable in polite society... but covert interest will intensify, as pornographic materials offer a substitute for risky live encounters.”

• “Traditional religious practices may revive.”

This is probably the only time, past, present, or future, when Jerry Falwell will find himself liking Futurist.

THE LAW-ENFORCEMENT VIEW ON THE NEW SEXUALITY

To resolve these wildly differing opinions, I went next door to get a more conservative slant on things.

My right-wing neighbour, Clyde, is an assistant district attorney. He awaited me at the door, escorted me to the study, and brought me a regulation Miller Lite. He drank standard-issue Perrier. Clyde wears a blue suit when he sweeps and dusts for footprints around his swimming pool. When making social conversation, Clyde stands at attention like G. Gordon Liddy giving a lecture on the Red Menace.  

".. the uncontrollable hysteria about herpes and AIDS now sweeping the Midwest and South will lead to a return to romantic love.”


"And too often all you can yet your hands on is your own best friend, you know, yourself.” We both laughed.


I wasted no time in popping the sex-change question. You don’t pull punches with Clyde.

“Sex practices depend on the ethnic and class demographics of the neighbourhood,” said Clyde with that clipped, know-it-all, law-enforcement cadence. “In the poor neighbourhoods, it’s low-life, misdemeanor mischief as usual. With those people, every man fornicates illegally and immorally with everyone. Lower-class individuals still coercively obtain the sexual favours of any helpless girl they can corner. Lower-class fathers still copulate with their daughters, cousins, you name it. They’re animals, pure and simple.” Clyde cleared his throat. I had a strong gut-feeling that he was enjoying this conversation, in some weird way.

“Middle-class people, as we well know, tend to restrict their immoral impulses and when they indulge, at least (here he coughed) they’re discreet. Thank God.

“As for the kids! Nothing new there. Spank ’em or spoil ’em, rotten through and through. As usual they’re in severe need of guidance, discipline, law and order.”

At this point Clyde rested his case and was excused from the witness stand.

THE POLICEMAN’S SON’S OPINION OF THE ’EIGHTIES MORALITY

To check this out, I spent an hour talking to Clyde’s son, Barry. He’s a freshman at a small Eastern college. He said that there were nineteen kids in his dorm floor, and only two were virgins. They were both hopeless eggheads. Sexual activity tended to be located in your clique. The dopers, the jocks, the intellectuals fooled around with members of their own groups.

“You mean, friends do it with friends?” I asked.

“Yeah, for sure. Dumb kids make it with each other. Smart ones with their chums.”

Basically Barry thought that all this talk about the new morality was just tired grown-ups talking wistfully about their own problems with waning sexual desire.

“Most kids think about sex all the time,” said Barry with a shy smile. “At our parties, we get X-rated movies and they play all night. To give an atmosphere, you know?”

“Are you saying that teenage boys still want to fuck anyone they can get their hands on?”

Barry laughed sheepishly. “Yeah, something like that. And too often all you can get your hands on is your own best friend, you know, yourself.” We both laughed.

“Haven’t kids always been hung up on sex?” asked Barry. “Look at the Fort Lauderdale deal. In most Eastern schools, kids can’t wait to cut loose. The weeks before spring break you can cut the tension with a knife. Girls can’t wait to pile into a car and head south. Boys too. And you know they’re not going to Florida to ski.”

FAST TIMES AT THE LOCAL HIGH SCHOOL

To check this out I went right to the source. I interviewed Marilyn, a senior in a Seattle-area high school. I was impressed by her poise and wisdom. To every question she responded, “That depends.”

“Are kids doing it as much as previous generations?” I asked.

“That depends. People fool around with the kids they hang out with. Like the jocks, they make it with the cheerleaders. The girls run around with bobby-sox and pom-poms screaming, ‘All the way, Bears!’ And the guys are always talking about getting their rocks off and crude stuff like that. These bonehead jocks go for that sloppy stuff. Crushing empty beer cans on their foreheads before they jump into the sack, you know.

Image

“Thee fraternity-sorority kids act sedate, but don’t be fooled. It’s a scam on their parents. These kids get dressed up in ’fifties gowns and dinner jackets and dance the fox-trot in the gymnasium, and their parents are so pleased they’re so conservative. Like little grown-ups. Well, hey! By midnight at the freeway motels, those lace dresses are being pulled off and hung neatly on chairs. And the yuppie drugs like cocaine and quaaludes are being passed around.”

According to Marilyn, sexual activity among high-school kids also seems to depend on the family racial and religious beliefs. Oriental kids seemed more straight, prudish, and hardworking. Kids from born-again Christian families appear to be more conservative. Anti-abortion and stuff. They all love Reagan.

“It sorta depends,” said Marilyn. “It depends on how good-looking they are. If the Christian girl is a real knock-out, she tends to forget Jerry Falwell when the glands start pumping. I remember one night this kid whose folks were away gave a party, and I walked into a bedroom, and there was this real hot-looking born-again Baptist girl on her knees in front of this football player. And she wasn’t praying.

“Come to think of it,” said Marilyn, “the most sincere Christian kids tend to be pimpled and chubby and running low on animal magnetism to begin with.”

In general, Marilyn thought that kids today were pretty selective, and laid back. “They do it, but keep it quiet. It’s kinda invisible. Friendship is important.”

“Is there a different standard for boys and for girls?” I asked.

“For sure. Guys that screw around a lot are considered hot stuff. And girls who come on to a lot of guys are considered wild.”

VOICES FROM THE 19TH CENTURY

My editor-archivist Michael and his wife/writing-partner Cindy came to visit me in Beverly Hills. In their research for Shaman Woman, Mainline Lady, an anthology of the drug experiences of famous women writers, they discovered that not only had many famous female authors experimented with the drugs of their time, quite a few of them had also linked drugs with sexual experimentation. Of course, these works were often published under pseudonyms and not discovered until much later.

One of their most interesting pieces of detective work concerned Louisa May Alcott, who, while writing Little Women and other books, secretly published "blood and thunder tales" under various pseudonyms. Among other things, she explored the link between drug use and sexual experimentation. Her most famous stories in this genre had the theme of seduction under the influence of hashish and opium.

She shared this interest with another great writer of that time, Mark Twain. Most people do not realize that the creator of Tom Sawyer and Huckleberry Finn wrote essays in praise of open sexuality. After his death his very proper wife burned most of his erotic works. At least 1601 survived—the American sexual classic of the period.

If these two icons of 19th-Century American literature could be teleported to the 1980s, they would probably be less shocked and more fascinated than most of their contemporaries by the cool hedonism flourishing today.

HOW COME KIDS DON’T KNOW WHERE BABIES COME FROM?

Image

Next, I arranged a lunch with my friend Fred. He’s a black counselor in an urban high school. As far as he was concerned, there had been no drop in sexual activity.

“What new puritanism? This country is floating in a sea of sexual stimulation. How about all these R-rated films on cable beaming into homes? Thirteen year olds watching naked bodies writhing away! In the past you could only see this stuff at American Legion smokers. Now, it’s right there in the living room! How about the X-rated cassettes! Over a hundred porn movies a month coming on the market! Middle-class families screening hard-core on their home TV! And the Calvin Klein ads and the raunchy MTV clips! Madonna and Prince prancing around half bare-ass. Never before in history has an adolescent generation been exposed to such wall to wall sexuality. And it’s all hooked up to advertising and merchandising.”  

They just won't take precautions. These kids apparently haven't figured out where babies come from! They cheerfully get themselves pregnant, not just once, but several times. These are not just unwanted pregnancies. They’re unconscious pregnancies.


Fred was worried. Not about immorality, but about the alarming jump in pregnancies. “1 can’t figure it out,” he said. “They just won’t take precautions. These kids apparently haven’t figured out where babies come from! They cheerfully get themselves pregnant, not just once, but several times. These are not just unwanted pregnancies. They’re unconscious pregnancies.

“I can’t understand it. They have all this information about sex. Manuals and how-to books and magazine articles, and yet they’re not using the data to manage their lives.”

Fred thought that television and films may have dulled consciousness and desensitized kids from the real, flesh-and- blood world. “You know; they watch Rambo in the theatres, bare chested, sweating, gunning down armies of gooks, and they watch Reagan smiling and waving while he’s sending bombers over Grenada and Libya, and they don’t realize the difference. They seem to think that sex is having aerobic fun rubbing body parts together like on the TV screen. They don’t seem to connect sex with the deep significance of the procreative act. It’s the yuppie-’eighties attitude. Sex is healthy exercise, good for your self-esteem. Like dancing and jogging and bowling.

“As I remember, it was different in the 1960s. It may sound naive to say this today, but during the hippie years there was a big sense of the sacredness of life. Consciousness was the key. Everything was very important. Holy! They even called psychedelic drugs sacraments. Can you believe that!

“And sex was an act of yogic celebration. A resurrection of the body! Sounds corny to say this, but there was an undeniable reverence for life in the 1960s. Anti-war. Peace and love, baby! People talking about raising consciousness. Kids putting flowers in the barrels of National Guard rifles. Ecological concern for the oneness of life. Which led to vegetarianism. And goofy, pompous idealism. And gee-whiz spiritualism. But it’s a statistical fact that the teenage suicide rates were way down in the 1960s and so w ere the unconscious pregnancies.

“In the 1960s there was almost no personal violence. People were blissed out, I guess. All the violence was governmental. Take Woodstock, for example. Can you imagine it? For three days five hundred thousand kids in gangs rolled around in the mud, listening to rock music, and apparently not one act of violence. Rape was unthinkable. Fighting was uncool, man.

“By contrast, during one week of spring break in 1986, seven college kids died in Fort Lauderdale, falling off hotel balconies, drunk. And in the Palm Springs Easter riots, kids roamed the streets, drunk, pulling bikinis off women in cars.

“Imagine the low state of consciousness of these kids when they get drunk and fuck. No wonder there are so many unconscious pregnancies.

“I’m talking about the coarseness, the meanness, the thoughtlessness, the materialism, the low consciousness of the Reagan years. Kids seem to be fucking more and enjoying it less, if you ask me.”

So said Fred.

IS THERE A GENERATION SEX GAP?

Image

The bottom line to this discussion?

Well, based on more than a hundred interviews and an extensive review of the available scientific data, I conclude that the amount of sexual activity today, as always, depends on age. The older you are, the less you think about and indulge in sex. The wild gang of rock ’n’ rollers who were our models in the past have unquestionably cooled down. I’m only talking about the living here, so to speak.

But look at those kids! If anything they’re doing it more and earlier. The 1984 Newsweek poll revealed that, by the age of 23, only 10 percent of college kids were virgins. And adults, as always, are wringing their hands about youthful promiscuity.

There does, however, seem to be one consistent sex change in our American culture.  

The quality and variety has improved. Especially for Americans in their twenties and thirties. They’re more sophisticated, and more selective about sex. Frenzied promiscuity is certainly out of fashion, especially among gays. The highly publicized orgies, the swinging, the swappings of the past turn out to be mainly media hype. It ain’t happening at all now.

Everyone is talking about it less. The current attitude: Be cool, do it wisely, do it well, and don’t flaunt it.

You won’t find the New Women hanging around the 7-Eleven reading Jerry Falwell’s biography. You’ll locate New Women in that third of the population that is better educated, upwardly mobile, and more sophisticated.

The rise in teenage pregnancy is also for real, but mainly in urban ghettos and among the underclass.

YES, VIRGINIA, THERE IS NO NEW PURITANISM

What about that new conservatism that you’ve been reading about? It’s a media hype. Network executives and magazine editors creating fads to boost newsstand circulation, reacting to the wishful thinking of vocal moral minorities.

Reformers and moralists come and go, but sexual attitudes today still reflect the basic, earthy American virtues of tolerance, good humour, common sense, and fair play. Sure, the right-wing fanatics continue to wring their hands at the idea that people are still pursuing life, liberty, and happiness. But rest assured; American women are not going to let themselves be put in veils and chastity belts. Despite Nancy Reagan, Americans still want to have fun and enjoy life.

There is no new sexual conservatism.

Nor is hedonism destroying our republic. Your daughters are safe, Archie Bunker. They are more realistic. They are smarter. They want to fuck friends, not strangers. And that has to be beneficial for the mind, for the body, for the soul, and for the American way of life.

There is no new sexual conservatism. Nor is hedonism destroying our republic. Your daughters are safe, Archie Bunker. They are more realistic. They are smarter. They want to fuck friends, not strangers. And that has to be beneficial tor the mind, for the body, for the soul, and for the American way of life.


Image

V.4. Digital activation of the Erotic Brain

A young woman named Vicki is alone in her bedroom. She sits on the edge of the chair with her legs spread wide. She is looking intently at a computer terminal on the desk in front of her.

Vicki is a novice cyberpunk. She is using an electronic-communication device for her own private pleasure, without institutional or government authorization.

At the moment, Vicki’s eyes are fixated on letters that wiggle across her screen. Vicki blushes with excitement. She is breathing heavily. She squirms into a more comfortable position, not taking her optics off the letters squirting across the screen like spermatozoa.

Suddenly the words stop.

Vicki smiles. With her right hand she begins typing letters on the keyboard in front of her.

VICKI IN THE AROUSAL MODE

Vicki’s words now appear on screen:

RECEIVE

OH RON ... I FEEL SO BAUDY WHEN WE'RE ON LINE.
YOU'RE SUCH A GOOD TRANSMITTER!
AND YOU DOWNLOAD SOOOOO GOOD!
OOOH YOU’RE SO COMPATIBLE-LET'S INTERSCREEN . ..
I LIKE YOUR BIG, STRONG HARDWARE. (WHERE?)
I WANT TO PUT LOVE-BYTES ON YOUR KEYBOARD
AND SLIDE YOUR JOYSTICK INTO MY F-SLOT.
TELL ME HOW YOU WANT ME TO ACCESS YOU.
PRESS ENTER AND I'LL BOOT UP MY MALE-MERGE FUNCTION!
OOOH! DISK OVERLOAD! MY SYSTEMS ARE CRASHING!


CYBERNETWORKS

Vicki is using her Macintosh computer to boot up and artfully program the lust circuits in her brain. Her software is linked up, via telephone, to the Amiga of a man named Ron whom she has never met. Well, never seen in the flesh.

Vicki and Ron first interscreened in a computer network. They started off quite sedately, both contributing ideas to a public-access conference on “CIA Terrorism in Nicaragua.” They came to like each other’s ideas; so they agreed to chat on a private line -- just the two of them exchanging electronic signals to each other through their computers.

Well, one thing led to another—as it often happens in male-female conversations. At first they joked and flirted. Then they started having imaginary dates. First, they’d select a movie. Afterward they’d select a restaurant, then type in their wine and dinner orders. While waiting, they’d discuss their reactions to the movie.

No one is implying that the basic skin-tissue hardware is in any way outmoded. Nothing can replace the kissing, cuddling, licking, nuzzling, nibbling, smelling, murmuring, sucking, joking, smoking, honey-moaning, fondling, biting, entering, and receiving the tender exchange of love's soft bruises.

But, however enjoyable, our bodily contacts exist for us only as registered in our brains. We sense the touch and taste and perfume and the membrane softness of our lovers only in clusters of electric signals picked up by our neurons and programmed by our mindware.


Then, as the imaginary, transcontinental night-on-the-town started winding down,

RON TYPED:
 
VICKI, I THINK YOU'RE BEAUTIFUL. I'D LIKE TO KISS YOU GOODNIGHT.


Vicki wasted no time typing her answer:

HER ANSWER:

WHY NOT COME IN FOR A NIGHTCAP. I'LL SHOW YOU MY DISPLAY MENU.


Well, the next steps were quite predictable. Both got slowly carried away. Vicki put a compact disc in the boom-box. Ron lit the fire. Slowly, timidly, they started typing out their sexual fantasies, step-by-step descriptions of foreplay, sly suggestions about what they would like to do to each other, and what each would like have done. Like most computer kids they are smart, inventive, and very shy, but just then, they were getting bolder and saucier.

Whew! After fifteen minutes of this cyberaphrodisia, they had constructed the most romantic, elegant, sophisticated, all-out, wanton, mutual sex affair imaginable. Prefrontal nudity, floppy disco, sloppy disco, hard disco, cyberporn.

Imagination, the creation of mental images in the brain, was realized in electronic form. The computer screen became the vehicle of their inner steamy, fantastic, cyberotic party.

THE ZEN OF CYBERFUCK

Ron and Vicki were using the power of modem electronics to brain-fuck, i.e., to link up their nervous systems by means of carefully selected signals transmitted between their computers by the phone lines. These lovers have thus become members of a fast-growing, erotic network—those who have discovered the intimate possibilities of cybersex. The secret is this: Computer screens have a powerful, hypnotic ability to create altered states in the brain. Two people communicating through their fast-feedback computers can access a range of brain circuits arguably wider than can be reached by bodily contact

This is because the brain and the computer work the same way—in the language of electric impulses, of light.

THE BODY-BRAIN RELATIONSHIP

All of us, I am sure, want to improve the wondrous pleasures that come through the soft tissues and silky membranes. Tender hands. Soft, probing fingers. Wet lips. Soft, curving thighs. Sweet, satin mounds and bulging protuberances.

No one is implying that the basic skin-tissue hardware is in any way outmoded. Nothing can replace the kissing, cuddling, licking, nuzzling, nibbling, smelling, murmuring, sucking, joking, smoking, honey-moaning, fondling, biting, entering, and receiving the tender exchange of love’s soft bruises.

But, however enjoyable, our bodily contacts exist for us only as registered in our brains. We sense the touch and taste and perfume and the membrane softness of our lovers only in clusters of electric signals picked up by our neurons and programmed by our mindware.

Image
ANDY FRITH

QUANTUM SEX

People who use computer signals to arouse each others’ sexual desires have stumbled onto the next evolutionary step in human interaction: quantum sex... cyberlust... multimate... infocum. Lotus 2-3-4. Electronic arts. Radio shacking? Broderbund? The Commodore, after all, is the commander of a fleet of pleasure craft!

It has been known for years that people who communicate via computer-phone link-ups can reach amazing levels of intimacy. This was a surprising development Most respected newspaper columnists, pop psychologists, liberal ministers, and conservative moralists had been warning that computers will depersonalize humanity, alienate us more from each other.

These media experts made the classic, dreary conservative mistake: trying to understand and explain the future in terms of the past Bureau-stats and managerials, their eyes firmly fixed on rear-view screens, think of the computer as a machine. A metal product of the industrial age. Sexless. Hard. No one, except certain decadent, black-leather, transvestite, hair-dyed, mechanico-freaks in the decaying slums of factory suburbs, fans of kinky, techno-punk musicians from Lou Reed, Talking Heads, and Devo, to Pornos for Pyros, Babes in Toyland, Pearl Jam, Ministry, and White Zombie, would think of using machines with ball bearings and transmissions and smoky, metal parts to enhance sexual and romantic experience.

It has been known for years that people who communicate via computer-phone link-ups can reach amazing levels of intimacy.


THE BRAIN IS THE ULTIMATE ORGAN OF PLEASURE

But the computer is not a machine. It’s a silicon subcircuit of an electronic brain. It’s an interpersonal communication device, a cyberphone.

Now, think about it for a moment The brain has no eyes, ears, full lips, strong thighs. The brain is a powerful know ledge processor packed away in, and protected by, the bony case of the skull. The same is true of the computer, a powerful thought-processor packed away in, and protected by, the metal case.

Both the brain and the computer receive, sort, and output “ideas” in clusters of electric on/off signals.

The brain, lest we forget, is the ultimate pleasure organ. And the personal computer, if we know how to use it, is a powerful organ for neurosexual intercourse.

When two people link up via computers, their “naked” brains are interscreening. Directly. All the complicated apparati of bodily contact—garter belts, bedrooms, zippers, bras, contraceptives, body parts—are bypassed. Your electronic tongue can slide along the Q-links into his soft pink receivers with no clumsy props to get in the way.

THE EMBARRASSING COMPLEXITIES OF THE TISSUEWARE

Suppose that Ron and Vicki had met at a discussion group and started dating. First at the coffee shop. Then maybe a cocktail lounge. Then dinners and movies. The first fumbling steps at intimacy—holding hands, knees rubbing under the table.

What to wear? The familiar mating-ground questions. My place or yours?

Then the complicated dance of mutual seduction. The nagging worries of the person with no more than average sexual competence.

He thinks: Shall I make my move now?
She wonders: Will he think I'm a slut if I grab a handful?
Is she smart? Is she pretty enough? Can I get it up? Does she like to transmit head? Receive head?
300, 1,200 or 2,400 baud?
32-bit clean?
Is he hip enough? Too hip? Handsome enough? Can he get it up? Can he boot me up the way I want it?
Who is this guy anyway?
Who is this dame anyway?
Worry. Worry.


TELESEX ENCOURAGES BRAIN PLAY

Digital foreplay is a wonderfully natural way for two people to start their mating dance.

Why use the word “natural” to describe communication via phone-linked computers? Actually, almost every animal species has developed distance courting, tele-arousal signals to pave the way for the eventual sweaty, writhing contact of genital sex and the ejaculation of sperm.

Insects telecommunicate their sexual desires with amazing gusto. Every little cricket you hear scraping his violin-string wings on a hot summer night is telling the neighbourhood ladies exactly how he’d like to do it to them. The horny boy cicada is talking directly to the brain of the neighbourhood girls.

The chemical scents (pheromones) of the female dog in heat are like telephone messages telling every lusty male within miles how the horny young bitch smells, looks, and tastes.

THE BIRDS AND BEES DO IT

Bird songs are a compelling way for arousing sexual desire. At the right time of year, usually in the spring, the male songbird’s body swells with testosterone—the male sex hormone. He bursts into song. He sends a long-distance, mating-dating message that is picked up by every female in the neighbourhood. The song boots up the sex circuits in the female’s brain and she suddenly starts thinking how nice it would be to have a lusty guy around to nibble her willing neck and stroke her soft, feathered body with his wings and climb on top with his wiry, strong, warm body and open her up with his straining hard modem and make her feel just the way her brain tells her a young bird should feel in the springtime.

Image
ANDY FRITH

ASTONISHING EVIDENCE ABOUT NEUROTUMESCENCE

Fernando Nottebohm and his colleagues at Rockefeller University have recently announced a discovery that “shakes the conventional wisdom of brain science... Nerve cells in birds go through giant cycles of birth and death... At the time of hormonal changes, the brain anatomies change. The specific portion of the forebrain responsible for singing, which is large in the spring, becomes half as large in the fall... Furthermore, talented canary singers have larger specialized regions than those deemed less talented.”

In other words, the brain is a sexual organ that can swell and subside like the pink membranes of penis and vagina. And the steamy brain gets turned on by compatible signals. And the songbirds who can give “good phone” grow bigger brains! What an advertisement for quantum sex!

TELEPHONE SEX

Telecommunicated sexual messages have become a standard courting technique in industrial-urban societies where boys and girls don’t get to meet and look each other over around the village square.

How do city kids get to know each other, test each other out as mating partners? The use of the telephone by courting adolescents is an inevitable step in human evolution. Q-sex is just adding a new dimension to the conversation of good, honest boy-girl lust. Appletalk is a direct way of turning on the teenage circuits of our brains.

THE CYBERNETICS OF THE ADOLESCENT BRAIN

At the onset of puberty, new circuits of our brains activate. The human body undergoes a sudden change, almost as dramatic as the metamorphosis from caterpillar to butterfly.

All sorts of new bumps and protuberances emerge on the nubile body. Breasts begin to swell and strain to be caressed. The little worm-penis of the school boy grows into a swelling, red tube of incorrigible desire. New circuits of the brain suddenly turn on, flooding the body with impetuous hormones and hot mating juices. The teenager becomes obsessed with sex.

Psychologists tell us that the teenager thinks of sex several times an hour. Involuntary erections strain the jeans of the embarrassed lad. Hot steamy currents of desire lash the body of the perturbed young lady—she screams at rock stars and swoons over the pinups of handsome movie stars.

Let’s face it, teenagers are often coarse, crude, and insensitive to the delicate needs of others. In the desperate grip of passion, they trip over themselves and hurt each others’ feelings.

That’s where electronic foreplay comes in.

CYBERFUCKING AND ELECTRONIC FOREPLAY

Teenagers use any means possible to turn on and channel their sexual drives. Boys study magazines like Hustler, letting the pictures and the text trigger off their imaginations. Girls devour magazines about rock stars and movie actors. The pictures activate the swelling “sex areas” of the brain. Remember the horny songbirds?

Moralists condemn solitary sex and try to suppress erotic-aesthetic publications that people use to trigger off their imaginations and boot up the “sex areas” in their brain. The Moral Majority gets convenience stores to ban Penthouse, Playboy, and Hustler.

EAR SEX IN THE CONFESSIONAL BOX

When I was a teenager in the dark ages of the 1930s, we were warned in the sex manuals that masturbation caused nervousness, mental breakdown, and eventual brain damage. The Catholic Church was pursuing its insane policy of stamping out genital pleasure and preventing the “sex areas” of my brain from swelling. I remember the kinky conversations in the confessional box.  

I would kneel in the dark booth and whisper through the screen into the invisible ear.

“Forgive me, Father, I am guilty of impure thoughts.”

“Which impure thoughts, my son?”

“I thought about making love to my cousin Margaret because of her dimpled knees, to Dr. O’Brien’s wife because she is blonde and has big boobs, to Clara Bow, to all the members of the chorus line of the Radio City Rockettes, to a girl I saw on the bus...”

“That’s enough, son,” Father Cavenaugh sighed. “Have you used any sinful books or magazines?”

The brain is a sexual or^an that can swell and subside like the pink membranes of penis and vagina. And the steamy brain gets turned on by compatible signals. And the songbirds who can give "good phone” grow bigger brains! What an advertisement for quantum sex! ..... Your brain wants to be stimulated, opened up, caressed, jacked into by a sure mind .... If you don't use your head for your own pleasure, entertainment, education, and growth, who will?
 

“Yes, Father.” Spicy Detective. Spicy Adventure. Spicy Western. Film Fun. Captain Billy’s Whiz Bang Joke Book. Atlantic City Bathing Beauties. Hollywood Starlets.

“Enough, enough!” cried the flustered priest “Such books and magazines are occasions of sin. You must destroy them.”

“Yes, Father.”

“Now, say a heartfelt Act of Contrition. And as your penance, say five Our Fathers and five Hail Marys.”

This whispered “tell and listen” ritual did little to prevent the “sex areas” of my brain from growing. Might as well try to stop the testosterone-drenched songbirds from singing!

Telecommunicated sexual messages have become a standard courting technique in industrial-urban societies where boys and girls don’t get to meet and look each other over around the village square.


Confessions were heard by bored or sex-tortured priests because it was their only erotic contact They obviously got off on it In a way we sinners were giving the good Fathers aural sex by kneeling there in the dark box, whispering our sweet little dirty secrets into the warm, open, trembling ear of the priest.

Teenagers today spend hours on the phone joking and flirting because it’s a safe and calm way to explore erotic interests without being swirled into grappling scenes. They stimulate each other’s imaginations, exploring and experimenting with erotic signals.

CYBERVAMPS: TELEPHONE CALL GIRLS

The telephone-sex call services advertised in the back of magazines like Hustler are another step forward in the art and science of brain sex.

Sandi’s phone-sex ad invites you to “Talk dirty to me! I’ll rub my nipples hard. I want to cum with your phone fantasies.”

Anal Annabelle promises, “I’ll spread myself wide open and give you all of me, Big Boy.”

“Beg for it!” says Mistress Kate. “I know what you deserve.”

“Climax with me! I’m hot, wet, and waiting!” murmurs Lisa.

IMMORAL EXCHANGE OF ELECTRONS?

Maybe you’ve felt that this stuff is a bit kinky. Perhaps you felt that telephone call-girl sex is a masturbation aid for lonely people with low self-esteem.

Maybe not. The moralists and spoilsports want us to feel guilty about phone sex. Bureaucratic cyborgs are automatically offended by any frivolous, hedonic, dilettante use of technology for personal delight. Phones are leased to us by Ma Bell to help us become better citizens and to call home at holidays.

Actually, neurophone sex link, if employed with a light touch-tone, can be a wonderful way to learn how to become skilled at telefucking.

TAPPING THE EROTIC MEMORY BANKS

The archives of our brains carry electric memories of our earliest teenage passions.

So why not retrieve them, turn them on, and enjoy them at will?

The trick is this: You learn how to format your brain to receive the cues, the sensory signals that activate your homiest 16-year-old memories. You can use a telephone call service or do it with a friend. Ask her or him to whisper to you the coded names and phrases of your first crushes. The songs of your heated season of rut. You’ll find yourself booting up your adolescent circuits with the teenage access codes. You are performing a neurolinguistic experiment You are executing a self-hypnotic age regression. You are “commanding” your own brain to expand the “sex areas.”

Now here is some good news: Your brain is apparently eager to oblige. Your brain wants to be stimulated, opened up, caressed, jacked into by a sure mind.

Your brain hates boredom. If you keep your brain repeating the same old reality tape, month after month, your brain wiD sigh and give up on you, just like a neglected lover.

For many people, cybersex—using the telephone or computer to arouse the brain— is easier than running around like a homy robot, pulling clothes off and on, jumping in and out of sacks with strangers. Unless you are incredibly cool and poised, it’s difficult on a first date to teach a new partner how to turn on your imagination and then start acting it out, while at the same time trying to master the private signals that turn his or her brain on.

Confessions were heard by bored or sex-tortured priests because it was their only erotic contact. They obviously got off on it. In a way we sinners were giving the good Fathers aural sex by kneeling there in the dark box, whispering our sweet little dirty secrets into the warm, open, trembling ear of the priest.


COMPUTER SIMULATIONS

Cybersex is a relaxed way of learning how to explore this brand-new frontier of cybercourse. The computer is a wonderful appliance for simulations and “as if experiments. The hottest selling software in the hobbyist market is simulation games. Flight simulation: practice takeoffs and landings. Submarine commander act out the Battle of the North Atlantic. Wall Street simulations: pretend you’re a hot-shot broker.

Now, if it’s all right to use software to simulate war, why is it not okay to simulate the most important game of all?

For many people, cybersex-using the telephone or computer to arouse the brain-is easier than running around like a horny robot, pulling clothes off and on, jumping in and out of sacks with strangers.


Why not get on line and link up with the brain of your partner? Murmur teenage sweet nothings into her brain-ROM? Stick your floppy disk in his cerebral software and whisper exactly the things he wants to hear?

Simulation: You are back again in your parent’s house flirting with your high-school crush! And while you are taking advantage of your parent’s absence by disporting naked in the rumpus room of your cerebellum, give yourself some credit You are a neurosexual pioneer! You belong to the First generation of your species to use your magnificent brain as a sexual organ. Without guilt With healthy curiosity. And a desire to please your cybermate.

Cybersex uses the powerful instruments of knowledge processing and communication to perform the most important task of this stage of human evolution.

You are learning how to use your head, to take over the programming of your bored brain. Surfing your own brain waves.

Cybersex and brain-fucking could be a key to freedom and growth. If you don’t use your head for your own pleasure, entertainment, education, and growth, who will?
admin
Site Admin
 
Posts: 36135
Joined: Thu Aug 01, 2013 5:21 am

Re: Chaos & Cyberculture, by Timothy Leary, Ph.D.

Postby admin » Mon Jun 17, 2019 8:51 am

Part 1 of 2

Image
 
VI. GUERILLA ART
1. Pranks: An Interview
2. Keith Haring: Future Primeval
3. Robert Williams: Power to the Pupil
4. On William S. Burroughs's Interzone
5. William Gibson: Quark of the Decade
6. How to Publish Heresy in Mainline Publications
7. Reproduced Authentic. The Wizardry of David Byrne
8. Conversation with David Byrne


Image

VI.1. Pranks: An Interview*

Andrea JUNO: V. Vale and I are doing a book on pranks, but not just run-of-the-mill college pranks. We’re interested in pranks as they reveal linguistic and behavioural insights—

TIMOTHY LEARY: Performance art, in a way...

AJ: In a way. We interviewed Paul Krassner and Abbie Hoffman because their activities stand outlined against a whole social and historical milieu of spontaneous pranksterish comments on politics and society. Just as in a sense the whole history of LSD was a prank. You helped shape a key period of history.

TL: I like the idea of “prank” in the sense of play. What does a prank do? It’s spontaneous, a little shocking, a little mischievous, a little jab in the ribs, or a push toward something different In a general sense I think the entire consciousness movement was dedicated to a playful rather than a serious approach, and certainly levity rather than gravity. Following great psychological teachers as Alan Watts, for example, who described everything as a play of energy or Goddess playing hide-and-seek with herself, things like that.

To me the essence of consciousness change is humour and gentle satire. It actually gets quite theological. One of my ten favorite movies is Monty Python’s The Meaning of Life. What is the meaning of life—is it all just a joke? So many theories of God have God as a very worried, compulsive, power-oriented person trying to keep everything in order. A theology just as plausible to me is the notion of chaotics of play and delight... innovation. There’s something exploratory about pranks—shaking things up, which, of course, is the basic technique of evolution. Chaos engineering.

AJ: Can you recall the early days of LSD research at Harvard and Millbrook?

TL: When we were at Harvard we were fortunate enough to have wonderful coaches, people like Aldous Huxley and Alan Watts. There was a wonderful Englishman named Michael Hollingshead who had a very mischievous sense of humour. His brain was so addled with mystical experiences that he saw everything as a prank. He was my assistant at one time; we were trying to test the ability of psychedelic drugs to change people’s behaviour. So we went to a prison, because that’s the obvious place where you can measure change: whether they go back and commit more crimes, or whether they stay out of prison.

I have always seen evolutionary steps, or psychedelic drugs, or tremendously life-changing events as being basically joyous, in the sense that you're liberating yourself and empowering yourself to change. You're recognizing the basic fun of the life adventure.


So we were taking LSD and similar drugs with maximum-security prisoners who were all volunteers. We explained what we were doing. We weren’t doing anything to them; we were doing it with them. We would take LSD with them in the prison. The first time we did it, it seemed like the most scary, reckless, insane thing we could do: to be going out of our minds in a maximum-security prison with the most dangerous, evil, homicidal people in the world!

I think the philosophic prank, the intelligent prank, the life affirming prank, is one that gives people a broader perspective or a new insight, so that they’re not taking themselves so solemnly, and realize that life is basically supposed to be joyous and merry.


We got to a moment in one of the first sessions when we were all looking at each other. We psychologists were afraid of the prisoners because obviously they were dangerous maniacs, and they were afraid of us because we were crazy scientists. Suddenly we were looking at each other, and they said, “What’s happening?” and I said, “Well, I’m afraid of you,” and they all laughed, “Well, we’re afraid of you,” so then we just broke up in laughter.

For the next two years the entire prison experiment continued (which was very scientific; we had personality tests, controls, and the usual procedures), but basically everyone who was involved in it knew it was a big escape plot. We were trying to help them get out of prison—we would get them paroles, and in general help them get going in life. The whole thing was a big joke in the sense that it seemed so simple to rehabilitate prisoners and make it into a prank, rather than make it into a crime-and-punishment saga of grand-opera criminality. That was an experiment which did in fact cut down the prisoners’ recidivism rate in Concord, Massachusetts, about 75 percent.

Another prank that we performed at Harvard was for the Divinity School. We worked with about thirty Divinity students. We had several professors from the Harvard Divinity School, famous ministers, and the dean of the Boston University Chapel involved. It was on a Good Friday, and we gave half of the Divinity students psilocybin mushrooms (the other half didn’t take them) to see if they indeed had mystical experiences. It developed into an incredibly wonderful, warm, funny mystical experience in w hich in the most lighthearted way we were helping people get beyond the confines of the church and the ritual.

When we would come back to our homes after working in the prison, we were exultant: What a prank! Here we were, taking these wild drugs inside a prison, while the criminal-justice officials were all cheering us on! Meanwhile we were seeing the comedy of life and the foolishness of repetitious behaviour and having a good chuckle. The same thing was true after the Divinity School project It started out so solemn and so serious with the hymn singing and the dean of the chapel giving sermons, and it ended with a tremendously life-affirming sense of joyous laughter. We got back to my house and were drinking beer afterward, feeling that we had tested ourselves, and tested human nature, and tested the extreme limits of the nervous system in a way that would seem almost unbelievable. We were taking “dangerous” drugs in a prison or giving “dangerous” drugs to Divinity Students with the top professors from Harvard, the Newton Seminary, and Boston University—and it all turned out to be a human coming-together!

AJ: How did they react afterward?

TL: They laughed their heads off with relieved joy.

AJ: And what about even later? Do you think these people made profound changes in their lives?

TL: Well, that’s something else. Having a revelatory experience or a deep mystical experience is one thing. What you do about it depends on an enormous number of factors. Everyone’s lives were changed by these in one way or another, but as for their behaviour—well, some would leave their wives, and some would get married. We had three ministers quit the church, for example, to go out and make an honest living!

I think the philosophic prank, the intelligent prank, the life-affirming prank, is one that gives people a broader perspective or a new insight, so that they’re not taking themselves so solemnly, and realize that life is basically supposed to be joyous and merry.

Image
ANDY FRITH

One of the problems with the ’sixties consciousness movement was: some people’s pranks are other people’s hurt feelings. So there’s an (esthetic courtesy about pranks. Forcing your sense of humour on somebody else, or disrupting people in a way that makes them angry, is not a productive prank. A productive prank is one in which you’re not doing something to somebody, but there’s some invitation for it, and there’s some openness to it.

AJ: Your work with LSD opening up consciousness did make some people fearful, resulting in your being fired from Harvard. A lot of people stop opening up, because it’s scary to start evolving your consciousness.

TL: But I have always seen evolutionary steps, or psychedelic drugs, or tremendously life-changing events as being basically joyous, in the sense that you’re liberating yourself and empowering yourself to change. You’re recognizing the basic fun of the life adventure.

Looking back, you could say that everything we were doing over a period of ten years was basically a prank. Ken Kesey, of course, called his group the Merry Pranksters.

AJ: Tell us about Millbrook.

There’s something exploratory about pranks-shaking things up. which, of course, is the basic technique of evolution. Chaos engineering.
 

TL: Millbrook was a very special moment in modem history, F think. We had 3,200 acres on an incredible estate where a mad Bavarian millionaire had built castles, drawbridges, gatehouses, and extraordinarily architected forests, shrines, hidden lakes, and secret groves. It was like a Tolkienian situation where we were almost totally protected, being in the middle of a 5,200-acre realm. It was very difficult for law enforcement, or anyone, to get to us.

We were on our own property minding our own business; yet the whole adventure was so mind-boggling and scary to those people who wanted to see it that way. For about five years we used this wonderful geographic base station as a place to explore human consciousness and the far antipodes of the human brain.

Well... this mad Englishman, Michael Hollingshead, had a typical prank.... he would solemnly tell everyone that there was a mysterious cave or tunnel under the castle where you could confront "the wisest person in the world."..►


Basically, we’d keep changing the script I’ve talked to many people who were there for a week or a month and they would say it was like this. But actually it would change each month. A teacher of Gurdjieff would come along and for many weeks we would study and live out and try to imprint the ceremonies and the notions of that particular approach. The next week some crazy vegetarians would come and we’d all go on nonprotein diets for awhile. There was an openness to change, and to experiment, and to innovate. Usually once a week there would be a psychedelic experience; someone would guide it That person could design it choosing the music, the rituals, the aesthetics, the schedule... taking people basically on trips.

There was a sense of adventure and a sense of excursion. There was always a sense of prankiness because we felt that what we were doing was the most innocent and the most idealistic—ultraromantic in a way—based on books like Hesse’s Journey to the East and Mount Analogue by Rene Daumal: the classic stories of the epic adventures of the mind.

So on the outside what we were doing might seem very dangerous to society and threatening to the police, but it was a very innocent sort of adventuring.

AJ: Can you recall any peak moments?

TL: There were an endless number of peak moments—it’s hard to pick out one, because there was such a rich texture of events flowing one into another.

Okay—I’ll tell you a prank. There was a professor from Princeton who was a lifetime student of Persian mystical poetry. He had done a great deal of translating. He wrote us, and then came up and visited. He said, “Obviously, most of the translations into English are wrong, e.g., that famous line from the Rubaiyat, ‘a loaf of bread, a jug of wine, and thou.’ The Islamic people don’t drink wine. The original Persian signified hashish.” But this word was not in the vocabulary of people like Edward Fitzgerald and other Oxford dons who were translating Persian poetry into some kind of Scoutmaster Upper High Anglican prose. Having dedicated his life to the study of this mystical state, yet never having experienced it, this Princeton professor was very eager to have us provide an “initiation” for him.

So we set up an LSD experience for him in the enormous baronial “living room” of this castle we lived in, which boasted high arched ceilings and a fireplace that could hold twenty people. We transformed this room into the motif of a Persian paradise, bringing in mattresses that we covered with silken tapestries. On the walls we hung Sufi paintings and embroidered wall hangings, and scattered Persian artifacts about The whole room was lit with Aladdin’s lamps. The music playing was Persian music and Sufi chants, some of which he had provided.

The professor was having the time of his life—his eyes were closed, and he was chanting along, and so forth. Then three of the young women of the staff came dancing into the room wearing belly-dance costumes. They were carrying trays of fruit, fine wine, and beautiful cutlery. It was the most elegant kind of presentation—not bawdy in any sense; it was just as though they had walked right out of the canvas of that famous Haroun al Raschid painting. I know that when I looked up, I couldn’t believe it either—but the amazed professor from Princeton felt he had definitely gone into Allah’s realm!

Incidentally, apparently there are some sections in the Koran that describe heaven where Allah lives as being this kind of situation; so we w ere literally making heaven come true! At first the professor was quite stunned, but he transitioned smoothly into the program, and enjoyed it But do you think that was a prank?

AJ: Of course!

TL: Well... this mad Englishman, Michael Hollingshead, had a typical prank. During the heightened suggestibility of an LSD experience, he would solemnly tell everyone that there was a mysterious cave or tunnel under the castle w here you could confront “the wisest person in the world.”

He would have every one hold burning candles. With dilated eyes and spinning heads, people would follow him down into the basement, which was kind of old and dark. And then, with the torches burning, he’d lead you down into a tunnel where you’d have to start craw ling under the foundation of the house, holding your candle. You’d crawl through various passageways, then suddenly come around a comer where the mischievous prankster Hollingshead had put a mirror! That was the ultimate confrontation with the wisest person in the world! Some people got freaked out by that, but...

Most of the time at Millbrook, after sorting through all the Buddhist and Hindu philosophies (some of which can get pretty tedious, pretty solemn, and pretty moralistic), we tended to end up with a Sufi approach, in which there was that light touch, and a sense that if you take enlightenment too seriously, then you’ve pulled it down—it’s got to have a bounce or a joyous movement and a smile on it.

AJ: Please tell more!

TL: Well, I’ll give you another example of a prank. Richard Alpert was my partner at Harvard. He came from a wealthy New England family; his father was the president of the New York/New Haven/Hartford railroad. Richard had his own private plane.

We would fly around the country in his Cessna, basically dosing people. One morning we left New York and flew down to Duke University in North Carolina, where Dr. Joseph B. Rhine, the world’s leading authority on extrasensory perception, had kept his parapsychology laboratory going for years.

Rhine was a Harvard graduate. His main problem was: He was so intent on proving that it was scientific that it was impossible for anything telepathic to happen! He was using cards, and sorting, and using the rituals of highly experimental contrived psychology. But at least he was still gung ho. He’d been studying parapsychology for twenty years, and nothing much had happened; he needed all the help he could get.

I’d originally met Rhine a bit earlier, when he came to Harvard and gave a lecture. It was the first time he’d been back in twenty years, because he’d been kicked out for parapsychology. No one on the faculty would introduce him. I did; so there was a bond of affection between us, besides the Harvard connection.

Richard and I flew down to Durham; we taxied over to the Duke University laboratory. Rhine had assembled about eight or ten of his staff to take psilocybin or mescaline or something. We sat around the laboratory where he had all these experimental devices set up. You’d be working cards or be predicting movements on graphs—these were highly structured experiments.

Image
ANDY FRITH

People took the psychedelic drug he gave, and after about a half hour he said, “Everybody line up for their assignment.” It was hard to keep people disciplined—I remember that one Indian gentleman, a famous Hindu professor from Benares, a very serious, nontrivial student of parapsychology, just wandered off. Someone went with him, because we didn’t want people just wandering around the Duke campus.

...► With dilated eyes and spinning heads, people would follow him down into the basement, which was kind of old and dark. And then,... he’d lead you down into a tunnel where you’d have to start crawling under the foundation of the house, holding your candle.... then suddenly come around a corner where the mischievous prankster Hollingshead had put a mirror! That was the ultimate confrontation with the wisest person in the world!


He wandered outside and picked a rose and came back. He handed it to Professor Rhine, and said, “This represents the ultimate in parapsychology.” That’s an old Hindu trick. Somehow this seemed very profound and impressive.

Soon Rhine “got the message” and called us all into his office. He sat down on the floor with his shoes off. It was the first time anyone had seen him with his shoes off—he was a “dignified professor gentlemen.”

He was sitting there leaning against the wall; then he said, “Well, let’s figure out where we’re going to take this thing. I’m beginning to understand why we’re not getting more results. We’ve been too...” Then he led a free-form discussion of changes in their plans that went on for about two or three hours. Then people brought in fruit juice and fruit and cheese and crackers. Richard and I saw that everyone had been brought back to planet Earth; so we looked at our watches and said, “See you around!” Then we grabbed a cab and drove to the airport.

We jumped into the plane and flew back to New York. We landed at La Guardia at Butler Aviation and took a cab into New York. The New York/New Haven/Hartford railroad had a suite at the Waldorf-Astoria that Richard could use; so we walked into the hotel, ordered champagne, and laughed our heads off at the implausibility of flying down to North Carolina, turning on ten or twelve very prominent and serious-minded academicians, leaving them in a wonderful kind of creative shambles, and then jumping on the plane and coming back!

That was an example of the way Richard and I looked at each other. There was a sense of real basic healthiness and openness about what we were doing. We simply couldn’t make any mistakes, because our hearts were in the right places. And we were watching carefully, and we would not let anybody go off on their own. There was just such an aura of youthful innocence (although we were in our forties) and a confidence in the goodness of human nature that during those days bad trips were almost impossible.

Richard in particular always had that mischievous sense. For a while he became a holy man—Baba Ram Dass—and got a little preachy; a little too holy for me. He’d say, “God, Pm a Jewish boy from Newton, Massachusetts, and now Pm a holy man!” But Richard always had that twinkle in his eye and that saving grace of Jewish humour that could always bring you down to earth.

I’ve often compared Richard Alpert and me to Huckleberry Finn and Tom Sawyer. We were going down that river having these adventures with, I must say, quite pure motives. We were not out to win the Nobel prize or to make money.

Mark Twain is one of my favorite authors of the 19th Century. There is such a prankish quality to his wisdom. He was a very, very powerful philosopher. A Connecticut Yankee in King Arthur’s Court and Puddin’Head Wilson with all those little twists. There is a sense of pranksterism that runs all through his writings that influenced us and guided us.

AJ: Can you describe that event when people tried to levitate the Pentagon?

TL: I was never very involved in mass meetings like that, although I think they were useful in the sense of a demographic show of strength. One reason things could be done by the young people in the 1960s was because demographically there were twice as many of them. It was the baby boom. Instead of 56 million, there were 76 million. So they could just call a mobilization, or call a celebration, or call a Be-In, and plenty of people would show up.

And 5,000 people smoking marijuana at a Be-In, or 14,000 at a mobilization against the war, or 500,000 at the Pentagon, was a show of presence that was very similar to the flocking of birds at twilight There’s a certain survival tendency on the part of the gene pool—and Pm talking generational genetics here—for groups to check each other out to see who are we, and what are we doing, and how healthy and big are we.

I respect and honour that aspect of the big mobilizations. But basically I thought it was silly to try to levitate the Pentagon. I remember we didn’t go; I think we had something going on at Millbrook. I thought they were positive, but I was never involved in them. There were many groups zooming around the country in those days: the Psychedelic Rangers, the Diggers from San Francisco, and Emmett Grogan, who was a great, mischievous, and somewhat hard-minded prankster. There were a lot of pranks going on. Ken Kesey is, of course, the number-one prankster.

AJ: Are there any more anecdotes from that period before we jump ahead?

TL: I’ll give you one more example. Allen Ginsberg came to Harvard when we were very square professors, and he just laid down the whole trip to us and said, “This has been going on for centuries.” He knew a lot about Buddhism, Hinduism, the beats, dharma, Kerouac, and all that; so he became our “coach.” Allen and I had a deal that we were going to turn on the most influential people in New York. Allen had this thick address book, and he’d peer at it with his thick lenses and say, “Come down next weekend. I’ll call Robert Lowell. Or Charles Mingus.”

One afternoon l flew down to New York and got to Allen’s tremendous, flamboyantly impoverished, filthy apartment. There was something so emblematic about his disdain for middle-class values, which was very interesting for me. We took psilocybin or something with Jack Kerouac and others. The next morning, without any sleep and with Peter Orlovsky, we took the subway and went uptown to the Hudson River westside-view apartment of Robert Lowell, the great Pulitzer Prize-winning poet, and we turned him on—very cautiously, because he’d had a long history of psychotic episodes and manic-depressive flights. But anyway, Allen sat with him while Peter and I hung out with his wife. And we finished that and got him safely landed back onto planet Earth.

There was a sense of real basic healthiness and openness about what we were doing. We simply couldn’t make any mistakes, because our hearts were in the right places. And we were watching carefully, and we would not let anybody go off on their own. There was just such an aura of youthful innocence (although we were in our forties) and a confidence in the goodness of human nature that during those days bad trips were almost impossible.


Then we jumped into a cab and went over to the house of Barney Rosset, who at that time had Grove Press and Evergreen Review. Here’s a classic New York neurotic intellectual with five psychiatrists and worry, worry, worry, and with a wonderful, extremely elegant, and aesthetic apartment in Greenwich Village. And we took extremely powerful mescaline... it was a very memorable, aesthetic experience. Most of the time Barney was in his study worrying and complaining to Allen Ginsberg that he paid psychiatrists $70 an hour to keep him from having visions like that! Anyway, it all worked out.

Then it was dawn the next morning and there was snow all over New York. We left Barney Rosset’s apartment. The snow had fallen on the garbage cans, everything was glistening, and the sun was coming up, and it was almost impossible to tear your eyes away from this blanket of magic that covered the squalor of New York.

Place your favorite pullquote here:

____________________
____________________
____________________


Finally we got back to Allen’s apartment and had another one of those philosophic laughs, just thinking of what we’d done in twenty-four hours. We had turned on Jack Kerouac, and then Robert Lowell, and then the top publisher in New York. It took courage and it took confidence in ourselves and knowledge of the yogic process to do this. And when it was all over, we looked back at what we had done, and could hardly believe we had performed these implausible acts.

AJ: I assume that you’re against spiking people—giving them LSD without their knowledge?

TL: Oh, yeah! That’s very unethical: to use something as powerful as that involuntarily. That’s what the CIA was doing. There’s a new book out called Acid Dreams, by Marty Lee, which is an annotated story of the CIA experiments. There were hundreds of experiments in which they would dose unwitting people.

We had one involuntary dosing at Millbrook. Someone had been keeping LSD in a sherry bottle—I forget what the exact rationale was. No; it was a bottle, and we put sherry in it—that was it—but we had had some LSD in it before, and we thought that we’d washed it out.

Apparently what happened was: A very famous Canadian television journalist with a crew had come down to film us. He was a very large gentleman; he must have weighed two hundred pounds and was about 6'2". My wife and I were sitting around in our living room with a bunch of people watching the fire. I’d had the sherry and my wife had had some sherry too, and after about ten minutes we looked at each other and realized, Wow! This sherry was loaded.

And just at that minute the Canadian producer came barreling up and said, “Boy, this is wonderful sherry!” And we looked at each other and said, “Well, sit down because—sorry about that, but we just found out ourselves.” And that guy had a real wing-ding of an experience.

AJ: Did he relax into it at all? What was his reaction when you told him?

TL: He was pretty scared, because he assumed that he had been deliberately dosed. He was trying to call Pierre Trudeau and have the Mounties sent down to protect him! For several hours we hung in with him and saw him through it And the next day he slept well, got up, took a shower, got out and took a walk, and was feeling fine. And this was an experience he’d never forget.

For him it was a very powerful experience, because at that time Allen Ginsberg was there, chanting and playing drums, and there were a bunch of Hindus wandering around the house as well; so the whole thing was like the worst nightmare for an uptight Canadian to be suddenly in this weird situation.

But the next day I went out for a walk with him, and he was fine. We came back up to our living room and sat down. My wife said to him, “Would you like a drink?” and he turned white and said, “No, thanks!”

That was not a prank, and I would consider that an unfortunate event But it turned out all right I was reacting to your question about dosing people.

AJ: What did he think about it later? Did he have a beneficial experience? Do you think he was glad afterward?

TL: Well, yes. He felt he’d gone through an ordeal, and was proud to have survived it In general, Canadians have a lot of ballast and solidity!

AJ: You used to put on these huge multimedia shows; you pioneered these spectacles and extravaganzas that almost simulated an LSD experience.

TL: Well, we had been working for several years at Harvard and Millbrook to develop a language to express the so-called “visionary” experience. So we were experimenting with slides, anatomical designs, and cellular programs that then developed into what was called “psychedelic art,” like the slide shows at rock concerts.

We were developing libraries of sounds and of mythic icons and so forth; developing a language of the ineffable. One summer, hanging around Millbrook, we decided to have a summer school. We were not allowed to use drugs (although people did on their own, I’m sure). The summer school ended with a pageant in which we used Hermann Hesse’s Steppenwotf. The last chapter is the Magic Theatre of the Mind—Price of Admission Is Your Mind. Harry Haller, the uptight, worried European intellectual, is guided by Pablo, and he has some kind of psychedelic experience. He runs through all these incredible hallucinations and inner trips.

one of the greatest pranks that I enjoyed was escaping from prison.


So we acted them out, and there were about two hundred people attending a masquerade party. You’d wander from one part of the castle to another, and be “set up” as you went; people would be acting out sections of Steppenwolf. It all ended up in the bottom of a big basement where we acted out the last scene where the hero tries to hang himself—he’s gonna go through the Judaeo-Christian guilt trip, and at the end the young woman says, “Take off the noose.” It was all done in silhouette and pantomime with the rope and the noose, and 90 percent of the people there were probably pretty loaded.

Some producers who were present were so impressed by it that they said, “Let’s put it on Broadway!” We brought it down to the East Village and then started doing psychedelic celebrations. They were multimedia events with a tremendous amount of script and sound and lighting. This was a very innovative art form that in essence led to a lot of special effects. A lot of people from Hollywood came and saw it. It was in the air at that time.

AJ: One more question about your debates with G. Gordon Liddy. It almost seems like a weird prank for you to be on the same stage with him. How did those shows come about?

TL We had the same agent You see, Gordon got to the White House because he was the assistant prosecutor in Duchess County, near where we were living in Millbrook, and he was raiding us all the time. He did drive us out of the county. Although he never got us for any drugs, he took credit for our leaving. As a result of his midnight raids on us he was brought to Washington, and this led to the midnight raids on Watergate.

I would say, as a finale to this funny conversation, that one of the greatest pranks that I enjoyed was escaping from prison. I had to take a lot of psychological tests during the classification period, and many of the tests I had designed myself; so I took the tests in such a way that I was profiled as a very conforming, conventional person who would not possibly escape, and who had a great interest in gardening and forestry.

So they put me on as a gardener in a prison where it was easier to escape. It was a very acrobatic and dangerous escape, because it was under the lights of sharp-shooters and so forth. I hit the ground and ran out and got picked up by the escape car. I wanted to be able to get out at least to the highway. If they caught me after that, at least I had made it that far.

The feeling that I had made a nonviolent escape was a sense of tremendous exaltation and humour and joy. I laughed and laughed and laughed, thinking about what the guards were doing now. They were going to discover my absence, and then they’d phone Sacramento. Heads would be rolling. The bureaucracy would be in a stew. This kept me laughing for two or three weeks. I felt it had been a very’ successful piece of performance art. Providing an example, a model of how to deal with the criminal-justice system and the police bureaucracies. Nonviolent theatre. That was a good prank... which was never appreciated by the law-enforcement people....

VI.2. Keith Haring: Future primeval

Image

Keith Haring was life embodied. He glowed, sparkled, danced through our visibilities; splashed living colours across our pop-eyes.

Was he not our graceful blonde Greek god Pan in track shoes spraying retinal trails of rainbow rods and technicoloured cones behind him as he buzzed our minds, zooming by at ninety smiles-an-hour, revving up his rpms (realities per minute) to record speeds?

Keith Haring played a vital role at a crucial time in world history. He accomplished his mission during the 1980s, a turbulent scary decade of negative pandemonium. At this time of cultural collapse and social chaos, Keith took up the traditional role of performing philosopher—humanizing, popularizing, personalizing, illustrating the great pagan insights of our race. He celebrated life, intoxicated dance, the jumping-jack-jill-joy of wise children, erotic energy, daemonic confrontations.

Barry Blinderman has described the nature of Keith’s play as “the hallucinatory interface of biology and technology in our increasingly cybernetic society.” Future Primeval, Barry’s tide for the Keith Haring Exhibition, really gets it right. Keith’s art spanned the history of the human spirit. Keith could have jumped out of a time capsule in the paleolithic age and started drawing on cave walls, and those people would have understood and laughed—particularly the kids. I showed his drawings to the Australian aborigines who initiated me, and they grinned and nodded their heads. Keith communicated in the basic global icons of our race.

And here we see another awesome dimension of Haring’s genius. As we move into the information age of the 21st Century, it is clear that a global language will develop. Literacy—the use of letters to communicate—is the major barrier between classes, races, nations. This new language will be iconic. It will be communicated in digital patterns through fiber-optic lines flashed on screens and virtual-reality eye-phone receivers. Graphics is the key to the information world of the future. Television passivity will be replaced by personal expression. Just as everyone was expected to “read and write” in the factory society, everyone will be expected to “receive and graphicize” in the future. Everyone will use digital appliances to become a graphic artist The graffiti impulse seen now in our inner cities is an interesting forecast And whose art has most inspired this future?

There is one final point to be made about the Dionysian power of Keith Haring. In his last years he confronted, wrestled with, and triumphed over the ultimate-major daemon of the human existence. Death.

In his legendary 1989 Rolling Stone interview, David Sheff asked Keith how having AIDS changed his life.

"When you are getting close to the end of the story, you have to start pointing all the things to one thing. That’s the point that I am at now, not knowing where it stops but knowing how important it is to do it now.”


Keith responded: “The hardest thing is just knowing that there’s so much more still to do. I’m a complete workaholic. I’m so scared that some day I’ll wake up and I won’t be able to do it”

David Sheff: “Do you make time for life outside of work?”

Keith: “You force yourself to. Otherwise I would just work. I spend enough time enjoying, too. I have no complaints at all. Zero. In a way, it’s almost a privilege. To know. When I was a little kid I always felt that I was going to die very young, in my twenties or something. So in a way I always lived my life as if I expected it I did everything I wanted to. I’m still doing whatever I want.”

Here are Keith’s final words in the Shelf interview: “When you are getting close to the end of the story, you have to start pointing all the things to one thing. That’s the point that I am at now, not knowing where it stops but knowing how important it is to do it now. The whole thing is getting much more articulate. In a way it’s really liberating.”

Literacy-the use of letters to communicate-is the major barrier between classes, races, nations. This new language will be iconic. It will be communicated in digital patterns through fiber-optic lines flashed on screens and virtual-reality eye-phone receivers. Graphics is the key to the information world of the future. Television passivity will be replaced by personal expression. lust as everyone was expected to "read and write” in the factory society, everyone will be expected to "receive and graphicize” in the future.


Now these are words. Strong words. Wise words. But still words.

Keith was repeating the wisdom of the Buddhist mystics who wrote The Tibetan Book of the Dying. There they listed the stages experienced as people face the ultimate event in their lives. Modem psychologists agree. First there is denial, then total anguish, and then, hopefully, the liberating acceptance. What is so moving is that Keith lived out, acted out, realized these powerful emotions in his last works.

In 1987, at the time he learned he was HIV-positive, he produced an astonishing drawing titled Weeping Woman. This work is shockingly different from Keith’s usual expressions. It conveys the anguish, the terror, that he felt and that we all felt when we learned of Keith’s condition.

A year later he was producing the most radiant paintings of birth and life celebrations.

And two years later Keith, in collaboration with his idol and mentor, William S. Burroughs, produced the monumental piece, Apocalypse, consisting of twenty silk-screens of poetry and inspired drawings celebrating the end of the Christian millennium and the beginning of the new paganism.

In the elegantly rendered introduction to Apocalypse, Burroughs precisely outlines the virtual-reality art of the future:

When art leaves the frame and when the written word leaves the page—not merely the physical frame and page, but the frames and pages of assigned categories—a basic description of reality itself occurs; the liberal realization of art... Each dedicated artist attempts the impossible. Success will write Apocalypse across the sky. The artist aims for a miracle, the painter wills his pictures to move off the canvas outside of the picture, and one rent in the fabric is all it takes for pandemonium to sluice through.


Material matters—from flashy atoms to clunky planets—are frozen clumps of electrons continually and rapidly melting, thawing, dissolving, fusing into what humans experience as chaos.

Speaking of "chaotics" always reminds me of Robert Williams, because his optical wizardry and his retinal philosophy-lyrics and his elegant eye-catching scholarisms are the dearest, most brilliant, down-for-real, flesh and bone expositions of quantum dynamics, quantum neurology, and chaos theory herself. The chromatic chaos disseminated by Williams is as masterful as it gets in the wood-pulp trade.

Einstein eliminated space-time. So does Robert Williams.

VI.3. Robert Williams: Power to the Pupil ROBERT WILLIAMS AND THE ROARING 20TH CENTURY

It was the historic (unction of the information-wizards of the 20th Century (artists, poets, psychologists, philosophers, musicians, linguists) to popularize, personalize, publicize, realize, actualize, visualize, and animate the scary, shocking, paradoxical implications and applications of quantum dynamics, such as:

1. The human brain is a network of a hundred billion neurons (each more complex than a mainframe computer). The brain is formatted and programmed by visual icons that attract our sluttish eyeballs, and imprint on our lazy, curious minds, determining the realities which we inhabit and maintain with others with similar visual addictions.

2. Those who control the illumination and sound, those who control what ripples our eyeballs and earbells, are those who program the “authorized realities” of the culture. Here is Robert Williams on the power of the pupil:

"Retinal supremacy" and "dictatorial power of vision" and "sight as domineering instruments of input" and "evolution... is greatly dictated by appearance" and "mystery is the eyeball's food and it will eat a trillionfold its weight a day! The Peeping Toms are given the keys to the observatory."


5. Perceptions of the solid so-called “normal” external worlds of rationalities are local, consensual. They are authorized hallucinations that are jealously guarded by the custodians of our eyeballs.

4. Marshall McLuhan taught us that to change the culture, you must change the media, the modes of communication. The mindscapes of “authorized reality” images can be deconstructed, jiggled, defocused, scrambled into chaotic fragments, and creatively recombined by a special breed of humanity: wizards, chaos engineers, designers of “unauthorized realities.”

Williams combines the mechanical with the bodily. The most banal, ordinary familiar objects merge, morph, blend, melt into disordered heaps of parish, technicoloured garage-sale piles of thoughts, icons, images.


THE COMICS

In the decades before television, comics—for obvious neurological reasons— were a most influential media for expressing “unauthorized” thoughts. Comics are visual, colourful, nonverbal, unreal, fantastic, nonserious, irreverent. They appeal to juveniles and adults seeking escape from serious, respectable, authorized realities.


Speaking of "chaotics” always reminds me of Robert Williams, because his optical wizardry and his retinal philosophy-lyrics and his elegant eye-catching scholarisms are the clearest, most brilliant, down-for-real, flesh and bone expositions of quantum dynamics, quantum neurology, and chaos theory herself.


I BLAME IT ALL ON FELIX THE CAT

Looking back, at the age of 72, I am embarrassed to discover that my basic bioscript, down to the smallest details, was based on a cartoon hero who was born, like me, in 1920.

Felix the Cat was this cheerful, bouncy, black-on-white figure whose mouth emitted musical notes. He whistled through life.

In his hand he often carried a cigarette and a champagne glass. This was during Prohibition—so Happy the Cat was publicly indulging in an illegal drug.

Felix was continually getting into scrapes, running up against “authorized realities” headlined in the other grey-print pages of the newspaper. At these moments, an electric bulb would light up over the cat’s head, and he would “think” himself out of the scrape.
admin
Site Admin
 
Posts: 36135
Joined: Thu Aug 01, 2013 5:21 am

Re: Chaos & Cyberculture, by Timothy Leary, Ph.D.

Postby admin » Mon Jun 17, 2019 8:52 am

Part 2 of 2

COMICS AND OIL PAINTING

Although his work emerged in the counterculture underground press in the 1960s and 1970s, Williams considers himself a painter rather than a cartoonist I do 2.

Please do not be confused by the appearance of comic-book, kid-stuff prankishness. Williams typically wraps his paintings with precise, sophisticated, scientific explanations.

He has not been accepted by the serious East-coast art establishment for obvious reasons. Oil paintings from Titian to Warhol have traditionally been used to program the eyeballs and brains of the “general public” to create “authorized realities.” Oil, canvas, and written word are the sacred tools, monopolized for centuries by popes, kings, authorities, to program authorized realities. Now here comes Robert Williams, scrawling graffiti on the Vatican Ceilings and the Oval Offices of our minds.

Williams’s paintings disturb the “general public”—but they delight and inspire the “specific public,” those millions who enjoy right-brain fuzzy chaotics and hunger for “unauthorized realities.”

His prefaces to Low Brow Art and Visual Addiction are brilliant literary events. Like his paintings, Williams’s writings are multileveled. He blends biting satire, comic wit, blazing libertarian bravado with a profound understanding of the psychology of visual-optical perception.

CHAOS ENGINEER AND UNAUTHORIZED REALITY DESIGNER

Like Geiger, the spooky Swiss wizard, Williams combines the mechanical with the bodily. The most banal, ordinary familiar objects merge, morph, blend, melt into disordered heaps of garish, technicoloured garage-sale piles of thoughts, icons, images.

Williams has mastered the jumpy, mind-jamming art of mixing left-brain-focused realisms with the jumbled, unfocused phantasms of the right brain. He overwhelms us, dizzies us by jumping our focus from figure to ground.

A Robert Williams canvas explodes with dozens of eye-grabbing images, objects, events rendered in irresistible screams of colour.

Any comments about Robert should pay tribute to his wife, Suzanne, who is beautiful, elegant, witty, and a brilliant designer of chromatic geometric paintings.

I consider him to be one the best informed, effective communicators around.

Image
ROBERT WILLIAMS

A Robert Williams canvas explodes with dozens of eye-grabbing images, objects, events rendered in irresistible screams of colour.


VI.4. On William S. Burroughs's Interzone

Image

Burroughs paints with words. He slashes at the page with expressionist, surrealistic word-strokes and verbal shotgun blasts.


William S. Burroughs is one of three 20th-Century literary giants who fissioned, dissolved, transformed, and digitized the English language; who beamed it and strobed it in holographic images into the 21st Century.

The American William S. Burroughs, his compatriot Thomas Pynchon, and the Irishman James Joyce are the alchemists who applied quantum dynamics and chaos theory to linguistics. These three wizards are not writers as much as they are "word processors."

Just as the equations of the three great German philosophers Einstein, Heisenberg, and Planck reduced Newton’s laws to local ordinances and dissolved solid, molecular-atomic matter into clusters-waves of electronic information, so did Joyce and Pynchon and Burroughs fission, with laser precision, the grammatical structures and semantic machinery of the old, classic language of Shakespeare.

It is no accident that physicist Murray Gell-Mann, who discovered the basic elemental unit of information, named it “quark,” a term borrowed from Joyce’s epic Finnegans Wake.

And it was Burroughs, with his partner Brion Gysin, who invented the “cut-up” method of wordmanship, slicing paragraphs from different writings—news clips, novels, instructional manuals, pornographic scenes—and splicing them together in random order.

In the words of Burroughs’s friend and editor James Grauerholz, “This repetition lends a kaleidoscopic quality to the writing—and what is a kaleidoscope but a device to reassemble endlessly the same particles? As if anticipating modem quantum physics, his world model is that of an indeterminate universe of endless permutation and recombination.”

Burroughs was born in 1914 in St. Louis. His grandfather, for whom he was named, made important contributions to the development of a computer-like machine that was marketed in America as “The Burroughs Calculator.” After a modestly affluent childhood, Burroughs attended Harvard University, where his intelligence, homosexuality, literary sophistication, and wide-band drug addiction launched a lifelong odyssey into altered states and neurological realms which have been charted by mystics throughout history.
 
Since 1938 Burroughs has operated as a visionary archaeologist; as an alienated, deep-cover espionage agent reporting about the human condition as observed from the seamy, gritty, sordid underworld of port towns, exile colonies, border crossings, and cultural black-market interzones. Tangier. Times Square. Mexico City. Panama City. The Left Bank. The Amazon jungle. Etc.

Burroughs describes the visionary landscapes, the detailed sociologies of imaginary tribes, hallucinatory cities, science-phantasy showers of steaming hot silver sperm sprayed by Venusian transvestites with platinum skin. While “the Jordanian soldier, convicted of selling a map of the barracks privy to Jewish agents, hanged in the marketplace of Amman, crawls up onto the gallows poop-deck to hoist the Black Wind Sock of the Insect Trust."

And so forth.

Bill Burroughs is a master journalist because he describes what is really happening in personal terms about specific people. Danny the junkie car wiper. The pimps and hustlers in the Socco Chico. Heroin cures at Benchimal Hospital. The Interzone Cafe, reeking of rotting, aborted, larval archetypes. Etc.

The book titles tell the story— Junkie, Queer, Naked Lunch, Soft Machine, The Ticket That Exploded, Nova Express, The Wild Boys, Blade Runner. And the magnificent final trilogy about apocalypse-death-immortality: Cities of the Red Night, The Place of Dead Roads, The Western Lands.

Interzone is a collection of dusty fragments and lost manuscripts that were rediscovered in the archives of Allen Ginsberg in 1984. It has been beautifully edited and introduced by James Grauerholz. The story? A savage satire. A dour, sour, grim, cynical exposure of official hypocrisy, puritanical repression, religious authoritarianism. Interzone provides a cool, dry, jaded, semi-tender glance at the social rejects, the dispossessed, the outcasts of the underworlds. A weary cheer for humanity in all its messy forms.

Burroughs has invented a post-literate language, a new medium in which words become clouds or clumps or clusters of meaning sprayed relentlessly at the reader like the explosive technicolour jungle of neon signs in Tokyo’s Roppongi district. Burroughs paints with words. He slashes at the page with expressionist, surrealistic word-strokes and verbal shotgun blasts. Like pictures in a gallery, Burroughs’s paragraphs need not be scanned in linear order. His work has been called “hologramic” or “fractal,” in that any paragraph might contain compressed sequences that unfold and recycle in later versions.

Above all, Burroughs’s work is humourous. He sees through the tinsel jumble of raw sweat details to the eternal comic strips of life. If any.

Bill Burroughs is a very funny man, and one of America’s greatest artists.

Image

Just as the equations of the three great German philosophers Einstein, Heisenberg and Planck reduced Newton’s laws to local ordinances and dissolved solid, molecular-atomic matter into clusters-waves of electronic information, so did Joyce and Pynchon and Burroughs fission, with laser precision, the grammatical structures and semantic machinery of the old, classic language of Shakespeare.


VI.5. William Gibson: Quark of the Decade

Image

Since 1984 William Gibson has splashed across our screens with four flashy, sexy, 21st-Century cybertexts.

Gibson's first novel, Neuromancer, swept the science-fiction awards and defined the cyberspace game. He imagined digital cycology and gave names, roles, rules, rituals, and geographical labels to those big, new, scary, abstract algorithms that are changing our virtual realities. The name was "cyberpunk." The role was quark. The new digital terrain the "matrix," aka cyberspace, aka Cyberia.

Gibson writes like a cyber-reggae musician, translating implausible, impersonal, unpopular, indecipherable equations into hip human terms. He turns quantum physics into Electric Ladyland!

PERFORMING PHILOSOPHY

The literature and art of any culture performs (popularizes) the science and philosophy of that epoch. For one example: The science of feudalism is theology. Therefore the art, literature, architecture, and music of the Cat Stevens cross-and-crescent crowd celebrates the religious myths and the luxurious lifestyle of the nobility, and the stem sword-and-dagger symbols wielded by the self-appointed special agents of God.

PERFORMING INDUSTRIAL SCIENTOLOGY

A second example: The science of the industrial age involves Newtonian law and order and the equally dogmatic, macho injunctions of genetic competition (unnatural selection) hallucinated by Darwin. The art/literature/music of this factory culture is institutionalized, socialized, formalized. Like contemporary science, it is obsessed with size, quantity, and replicability.

Please meet the cast of characters: orchestra directors, art gallery owners, officials and members of the Writers Guild who typically stake out, colonize, and exploit a class or region or genre. The mystery story. The romance. The biography. The historical novel. The Southern novel. Poetry. The Jewish novel. Science fiction.

Literary factory assembly lines. The highly profitable Book-of-the-Month currently owned by Time-Life, Inc. best-seller lists. Crown and Waldenbook chains. The Pulitzer Prize! The Nobel Prize! Newton, Darwin, and the engineer scientologists of the 19th Century sought to impose law and order upon a chaotic universe. So did the authoring world.

PERFORMING PSYCHOLOGY

And here comes the postindustrial-electronic age. Quantum linguistics. Einstein, Heisenberg, Planck, Bohr, Fredkin faxed us the scary news. Who among us could handle it? It seems that the universe, from galaxy to atom, is made up of bits of very highly miniaturized units of data. These singular bit-izens of the galaxy are called quarks. This fifteen-billion-year-old information array is literally an electronic telecommunication show. The universe is a bunch of digital programs running, running, running. There are no “laws.” And no “orders.” Evolution is programmed by algorithms that use the adjacent geometry of cellular automata recursion. The universe is evolving every second with or without you or me.

Here come the quarks!

There goes the von Neumann neighbourhood!

It gets worse! Realities are determined by whoever determines them. The elements of the universe are digital, electronic, linguistic. Matter and energy are transitory hardware constructions. (Plato and Buddha, it turns out, were early cyberpunks.)

The human brain is hereby and henceforth owned and operated by an individual. It is equipped with a hundred billion micro-info-centers called neurons, and is a miniaturized digital representation of the galaxy, which is equipped with a hundred billion mini-info-centers called stars. The universe is equipped with (naturally) a hundred billion mega-info-centers called galaxies.

Let us not be confused by outmoded tech-mech, latch-jockey, engineer-hardware Newtonian bullshit In the feudal and industrial ages, size was everything. Bigger was better. Darwin was all about big numbers. Viral genetics. Spread that sperm, Mr. Macho Male! Infect every dumb egg you can bang your penetration stinger into. Replicate yourself. More is better.

Good news, Ladies! In the info-world, smaller is beautiful. Smaller is more. Because it means singularity. Selectivity. Miniaturization-compaction means “power to the individual.” That noisy, polluting, factory-made mass-matter-energy-momentum that the male-order crowd enjoys? It works off static hardware constructed by robotic Newtonian laws governing gravity (!), matter lumbering along at a snail pace of c, the speed of light Matter is frozen boulders of information. Matter is thinking by committee. Start dissolving matter, and you free individual intelligence. “Individual intelligence” is a redundancy, just like “Harvard Square.” Artificial intelligence is an oxymoron. The alchemists knew this. Solve et coagulare. Warm it up. Loosen it up, and you free the units of intelligence (quarks). Quarks are programmed to link up with other individual data-pax. This is called “jacking in.”

Digital-information cloud constellations are what count in the info-economics of nature. A quark is almost pure information. It has only one hardware function: “off-on.” A quark probably has as much cyberpower as an atom. Don’t be so impressed by the gigantic atom, spinning around with heavy nucleus and myriads of planetary electrons and space debris. The average atom is the vehicle navigated and programmed by quarks. This is not to depreciate the atom, an info-center that has as much cyberpower as a neuron, which, in turn, has as much cyberpower as a galaxy.

E =mc 2 is an engineering blueprint The basic equation is I=mc 2, where “I”am information. Grammatically speaking, the quark should be thought of as first person singular. A single neuron has more information power than a sun! The exploding star is just noisy hardware! Your brain has more information crammed into it than all the stars in the galaxy. A brick-size cram of digital information is more powerful than Mount Everest.

Here’s a pop version of this principle: an invisible packet of DNA has enough algorithms to grow you an Amazon rain forest!

This quantum reality is unbearably light stuff for a culture of God-fearing, up-tight farmers and factory engineers. This simple minimalist mathematique of apparent disorder seems to offer no mercy to the unprepared. None!

Well, fuck it! What self-respecting singularity, quark, or neuron wants mercy, anyway? And, for that matter, who are these self-appointed feudal judges and industrial managers who want to convict a brain-carrying human, at birth, of indescribable sins/crimes and claim for themselves the power to give mercy? Give mercy to a quark? To a brain? To a galaxy? To a strand of DNA?

We are stuck with these jolly Sartrean, Foucault, Fredkin algorithms that have been churning out radio and television signals for fifteen billion years and the meter still running. The realities include Koran, Bible, Talmud, in addition to peacock feathers, passionflowers, aphrodisiac resins of certain aesthetic vegetables, Jimi Hendrix tapes, interpersonal computers, and the enigmatic smile on your lover’s face at the moment of orgasm.

Q. Who can explain these mysterious digital programs? Who can read us young, wanna-be quarks nice bedtime stories to make us feel secure about loosening up? Who can make us feel comfortable with the chaotic science of our wild times? Who can make us laugh at the structures crumbling before our eyes in Einstein smiles because relativity and the fractal natures of the running programs are always funny? (Why? Because they surprise us.) Who will get us giggling like shocked schoolkids at the facts of life? Who will tickle us with accurate disorder?

A. The artists-poets-musicians-storytellers. The popularizers of quantum linguistics.


James Joyce (who coined the word “quark”) taught us elementary word processing and demonstrated how to atomize the molecules of grammar. Think of Joyce as a primitive, predigital visionary like Alan Turing. William S. Burroughs was the next alchemical writer to slash the word line, dissolve the chains of static grammatical form, cut up pages of prose, free the squirming atomic words, and let them reassemble in random disorder.  

Gibson writes like a cyber-reggae musician, translating implausible, impersonal, unpopular, indecipherable equations into hip human terms.


Burroughs and his pal Brion Gysin knew how the algorithms unfolded. IF you free the individual info-units, THEN they will combine in the natural way (i.e., as programmed). Burroughs was the first author to use scientific concepts in his art—no accident, perhaps, since his grandfather and namesake invented the first successfully marketed mechanical computer.

Thomas Pynchon was the greatest and last of the “quantum linguists.” (We do not use the nervous term “science fiction” to describe the quantum-science writers.) Classical science fiction was tech-mech fantasy, a serious attempt to impose engineering law and order on the future. Asimov, Heinlein, Lucas, and their ilk were loyal company men using art in a last attempt to impose mechanical order on the postmechanical future. The ultimate writer of the industrial age was L. Ron Hubbard. His factory-writ tin-can books, engineered by “Hubbard, Inc.,” still sell millions of copies.

Gibson has produced nothing less than the underlying myth, the core legend, of the next stage of human evolution. He is performing the philosophic function that Dante did for feudalism and that Melville, Tolstoy, Mann, and Lawrence did for the industrial age.


Timing is everything in the info-world. After fifteen billion years of evolution, Gibson hit that small window, born between 1946-64 in North America, right on target! As a member of the first cybernetic (television) generation, he was not the only available brain-carrying info-unit programmed to “flip on.” The program had readied a million or so baby-boom quarks with the same if/then algorithms.

Image

Let me suggest some of the techniques used by William Gibson to illustrate/personalize quantum psychology (cycology).

First we note that all of Gibson’s writings, like those of Pynchon and Burroughs, humanize high technology. His cybertech characters are street-smart inhabitants of countercultures. Digital appliances and space-tech gadgets jam the landscapes through which his characters move.

His anti-heroes—Case, Bobby Newmark [sic], Bobby Quines, Johnny Mnemonic, Fox’s partner in New Rose Hotel, are “cyberpunks.” They are human versions of the basic element of the quantum universe. They are quarks. Prime numbers—divided by themselves and I.

Quarks are loners. Free agents. Quarks have minimal hardware power in the material world. They have little interest in, and no loyalty to, institutions. They are alien-ates. Outsiders. Dropouts. Their function is to activate themselves by “turning on” to psyberspace within and to be ready to “tune in” (jack in) to cyberspace on the other side of the screen.

Quarks are free-radical individuals who flip “in” to receive the algorithmic instruction from their neurons and then flip “out” to cybertown. When they are operating “in” psyberspace or operating “out” in cyberspace, they are pilots navigating the oceans of digital information. Cyberpunks are bored with “hard reality.” They are happiest when operating in the inner or outer matrix.

Dude Flatline is the code-cowboy whose wetware-brain was scrubbed and whose ROM version coached Case through his epic adventures. As his reward, he wished only to be left alone in the matrix with no involvement in the hard world.  

Gibson’s definition of women in the cybernetic age also deserves admiring scrutiny. Unlike his males, his female characters are strong, independent, effective, heroic, and powerfully attractive. They are shaman ladies, sophisticated wizards, playful, humorous, hip diviners. Gibson’s women have more material power, worldly know-how, political juice, although they rarely “jack in” with “trodes.” They seem more at home in the matrix. It’s as though the women are out there in Cyberia already, watching—with patronizing fondness—the klutzy guys scrambling around in both the material and the digital worlds.

Nor can we ignore the global, international interracial nature of his casting. We note his slick mixture of voodoo power, oriental wit, and American innocence. He wisely bases his 21st-Century cyberculture on pre-Christian, preindustrial pagan, feminine, trance cultures. His use of voodoo foundations is inspired.

Gibson has produced nothing less than the underlying myth, the core legend, of the next stage of human evolution. He is performing the philosophic function that Dante did for feudalism and that Melville, Tolstoy, Mann, and Lawrence did for the industrial age.

Gibson gives us the cast of characters and the landscapes of the immediate future. Other, more influential performing Homeric philosophers may come along to script, direct, and screen our futures, but they will consciously and gratefully build on the foundations given us by Bill Gibson.

Image  
ANDY FRITH

VI.6. HOW TO PUBLISH HERESY IN MAINLINE PUBLICATIONS

The French semiotix, Michel Foucault, has demonstrated that those who control the thought-engines (i.e., the mass media) control the minds of the people. The Tien An Men students in China learned how to use television to create history from American dissidents of the 1960s. The geriatric Deng clique learned to deal with student revolts by watching Nixon’s Kent State massacre on television.

Like many outsiders, I have become fascinated by the manufacture of “news” by those who control our press and television. Therefore, for the last few years I have experimented with methods by which the lone individual can insert irreverent, dissident, and libertarian perspectives into the information assembly lines.

For example, the editorial pages of newspapers publish opinion pieces by well-known columnists. These syndicated pundits are selected to give the illusion of a variety of viewpoints, but in reality such columns cover only a narrow spectrum between the extreme right wing of the CIA-Pentagon fan club (Safire, Will Buckley, etc.) and the bland, tame platitudes of the loyal “liberal” opposition. If somebody like me—or Alexander Cockburn or Noam Chomsky or even Gore Vidal— were to submit a truly dissident essay to the mainstream press, no matter how convincing the facts and witheringly brilliant the logic, there is little chance that it would be published.

“Letters to the Editor” is the only section of the paper where far-out opinions are expressed. The publicity wings of the various political and religious groups know this, and tend to flood the editorial offices with their boiler-plate propaganda. Extreme fascist opinions, which “respectable” columnists dare not mention, can be published this way; and sometimes even libertarian or truly heretical views can also creep into print this way.

I have a high rate of success when I write under pen names, particularly if the social-ethnic flavor of the name fits the content.


In the last ten years I have written hundreds of letters to the Los Angeles Times , the Los Angeles Herald Examiner, and Los Angeles Weekly. Letters signed with my own name usually vanish down the memory hole and do not appear in print However, I have a high rate of success when I write under pen names, particularly if the social-ethnic flavor of the name fits the content For example, I invented the name of Mary Agnes O’Brien, to question the position of Mother Teresa and the pope on birth control. I invented I. J. Katz, a retired rabbi, to criticize Zionist extremism. Zachary Chase was a junior-high-school student who was disturbed by the bloodbath mentality revealed in the many quotes from President Reagan.

The lost effective info-raid technique is to avoid stating dissident opinions openly. Simply adopt the current establishment line. Select the most outrageous, flamboyant aspect of the hard-line position. Exaggerate it a bit (in the manner of Voltaire), and "defend” it in the passionate jargon of the true believer. Satire teaches those deaf to logic and evidence.


The most effective info-raid technique is to avoid stating dissident opinions openly. Simply adopt the current establishment line. Select the most outrageous, flamboyant aspect of the hard-line position. Exaggerate it a bit (in the manner of Voltaire), and “defend” it in the passionate jargon of the true believer. Satire teaches those deaf to logic and evidence.

Here, for example, is a letter that addresses the recent Bush-generated hysteria about the American flag-burning episode.

Dear Editor,

Even flaming liberals agree that scrawling anti-American or anti-religious graffiti on the Washington Monument should not be constitutionally protected. Nonetheless, some card-carrying ACLU lawyers apparently convinced the Supreme Court that a flag bought and paid for by some individual mental patient is not a national monument.

Surely, now other self-appointed civil-liberties lawyers will defend the more insidious case of "closet creeps" who will undoubtedly continue to burn flags in the privacy of their own homes, thus evading detection and prosecution even if Bush's proposed amendment is passed. Can not our schools and police educate children to turn in such parents?

In this current climate of global disrespect for authority and for sacred symbols, should not the right to possess, transport, and sell sacred symbols like the flag, the Blessed Sacrament, guns, and Bibles be restricted to patriotic and God-fearing citizens whose loyalties are beyond suspicion and who can be counted on not to desecrate in public or in private?

For example, suppose you saw a Jesse Jackson follower like Willie Horton swaggering down the street with an American flag in his hand, or a Dukakis follower with a Bible in his hand. Wouldn't this make you wonder uneasily what people like that might do with these sacred relics when nobody is watching?

Mary Agnes O'Brien


Readers are encouraged to experiment with this American method of samizdat, info-guerilla tactics.

************************

Reproduce: to generate offspring by sexual or asexual union; to produce again or renew; to recreate.

Authentic: Entitled to acceptance because of agreement with known fact or experience, reliable, trustworthy. For example, an authentic portrayal of the past, present, or future.

VI.7. Reproduced Authentic: the Wizardry of David Byrne

Image

Reproduced Authentic is a magnificently bound art book containing five paintings by David Byrne and four other artists that were converted to 8-1/2 x 11" images transmitted from New York to Tokyo via telephone line by facsimile. They were exhibited at Galerie Via Eight, a show curated by Joseph Kusuth.

I consider this apparent oxymoron, "Reproduced Authentic," to be the most fascinating issue confronting us as we move from the solid, possessive materialism of the feudal-industrial societies to the relativity-recreativity of the electronic stage.

Now that Newton's laws have become local ordinances, clunky, static art treasures of wood, marble, canvas, and steel become crumbling curiosities, their value insanely inflated by well-marketed "rarity." These archaeological antiques are huckstered at Sotheby auctions, guarded by armed guards in vault-like galleries, or in the mansions of wealthy collectors.

Thus the wretched caste-class possessiveness of feudal and industrial cultures that prized "rarity." Thus the $80 million market for canvases that the unauthentic painter Van Gogh could not "transmit" for a 5-franc meal at the local bistro.

To the feudal aristocrat as well as the Manhattan art critic, "authentic" means a "rare original": a commodity traded by gallery merchants and monopolized by owners. The politics of solid-state aesthetics is authoritarian and one way. There are the owner-producers. And there are the gawkers.

TRANSMISSIBILITY REPLACES RARITY

According to the German philosopher, Walter Benjamin, "The authenticity of a thing is the essence of all that is transmissible from its beginning ranging from its substantive duration ... to the history which it has experienced. Rarity . . . now is a . .. mask of art's potential for meaning ... and no longer constitutes the criterion of authenticity . . . Art's meaning then becomes socially (and politically) formed by the living,"

These liberating, egalitarian notions of "reproduced authentic" and transmissibility are the application of quantum-field dynamics and Einsteinian relativity and interpersonal psychology to humanist electronic communication.

Image

The implications are profound and timely. The politics are interactive. The passive consumers become active agents who receive electronic patterns on their screens, disks, fax machines, and then transform . . . transmit . . . re-create . . . re-animate.

What is "authentic" is not the possessed object but the ever-changing network, the entangled field of electronic interactions through which the essence-icon is continually re-created and re-animated.

David Byrne is a member of a small group of illuminati who perform the important role of navigating our future. Multimedia wizards who experiment with new forms of reproducing and transmitting. People who perform philosophy, if you will.


The 12-year-old kid in the inner city slides the disk containing the Mona Lisa into her Macintosh, colours the eyes green, modems it to her pal in Paris, who adds purple lipstick and runs it through a laser copier; it is then faxed to Joseph Kusuth for the next Galerie Via Eight show in Tokyo.

It is this transmissibility, this global interactivity that David Byrne authenticates so gracefully.

What is "authentic" is not the possessed object but the ever-changing network, the entangled field of electronic interactions through which the essence-icon is continually re-created and re-animated.


David Byrne is a member of a small group of illuminati who perform the important role of navigating our future. Multimedia wizards who experiment with new forms of reproducing and transmitting. People who perform philosophy, if you will.

For starters, David helped found The Talking Heads, arguably one of the ten most important rock bands of all time. He directed two innovative films— True Stories and Ile Aiye, a haunting documentary about Brazilian religious festivals. He won an Oscar for scoring The Last Emperor.

His publishing house, Luaka Bop, transmits global sound. His album Uh Oh fuses the best of Byrne: biting hard rock, pulsing Latin drive, 21st-Century flair, Talking Head sass.

David Byrne transmits the message of the new breed, the Mondo 2000 spirit. Human. Funny. Global. Passionate. Laid back. Friendly. Ironic. Wise.

And, oh, yeah ...

Reproduced.

Re-creational.

Authentic.

Image
CAROLYN FERRIS

VI.8. Conversation with David Byrne
With television and movies and records being disseminated all over the globe, you have instant access to almost anything, anywhere. But it’s out of context-free-floating. People in other parts of the world -- India, South America, Russia -- have access to whatever we’re doing. They can play around with it, misinterpret it, or reinterpret it, and we’re free to do the same. It’s a part of the age we live in. There’s that kind of communication -- even though it’s not always direct.


TIMOTHY LEARY: I mention you in every lecture I give, because you represent the 21st-Century concept of international-global coming together through electronics. How did you get into that?

DAVID BYRNE: With television and movies and records being disseminated all over the globe, you have instant access to almost anything, anywhere. But it’s out of context—free-floating. People in other parts of the world—India, South America, Russia -- have access to whatever we’re doing. They can play around with it, misinterpret it, or reinterpret it, and we’re free to do the same. It’s a part of the age we live in. There’s that kind of communication—even though it’s not always direct.

TL: The young Japanese particularly. Read those Tokyo youth magazines! They pick up on everything. Rolling Stone is like a little village publication compared to Japanese mags.

DB: They’re very catholic in that sense.

TL What’s your image in the global new-breed culture? How are you seen in Brazil, for instance?

DB: I’m seen as a musician whom some people have heard of—not a lot—who has an appreciation of what Brazilians are doing. Sometimes it’s confusing for them, because some of the things I like are not always what their critics like.

For instance, some of the records on Luaka Bop—like music from the Northeast, and even some of the Samba stuff—is considered by the middle and upper class and intelligentsia to be lower- class music. Like listening to country and western or rap here. They’re surprised that this “sophisticated” guy from New York likes lower-class music instead of their fine-art music.

But sometimes it makes them look again at their own culture and appreciate what they’d ignored. Much in the same way that the Beatles, Rolling Stones, and Eric Clapton made young Americans look at Muddy Waters and Howling Wolf. I’m not doing it intentionally, but it has that effect.

TL: What music do you listen to? Who are your favorite musicians now?

DB: The last Public Enemy record was just amazing—a dense collage with a lot of real philosophy. I listened to the last Neil Young record. I have some records from Japanese groups, and Brazilian and Cuban stuff—all the stuff we’ve been putting out on the label.

TL: Tell us about Luaka Bop.

DB: I put together a compilation of songs by important Brazilian artists a couple of years ago, and afterward I thought it could be an ongoing thing. I figured that I might as well have an umbrella mechanism so that people might see the label and check it out It was a practical thing in that way. We’re now slowly getting into a greater range of things. In the future we’re going to release soundtracks for Indian movies, an Okinawan pop group, and a duo from England. That will be one of our few releases in English.

TL: Marshall McLuhan would be very happy with that—globalization. What about your symphony, The Forest?

DB: It was originally done for a Robert Wilson piece. The idea was that we’d take the same story—the Gilgamesh legend. He’d interpret it for stage and I’d do it as a film. We’d use my music. The hope was that we’d present them in the same city at the same time. So you could see two vastly different interpretations of a reinterpreted ancient legend. I found it’s the oldest story we know. We updated it to the industrial revolution in Europe.

TL Cosmology and immortality.

DB: It was written in the first cities ever built. Oddly enough, it deals with the same questions that came up during the industrial revolution and persist today—when cities and industry expand at a phenomenal rate. It deals with what it means to be civilized versus natural. So it has a current resonance, although it’s as old as you can get.

TL: The older I get, the more I see everything in stages. I start with the tribe and move through the feudal, Gilgamesh, the industrial... But what’s impressed me about your music is that regardless of the setting, there’s always the African body beat.

DB: It’s part of our culture now. It’s something we’ve been inundated with. The Africans who were forcibly brought here have colonized us with their music, with their sensibility and rhythm. They’ve colonized their oppressors.

TL: Michael Ventura, who explains how Voudoun came from Africa, says the same thing. I wrote an article about Southern vegetables—we colonials going into Southern cultures and grabbing their sugar, coffee, and bananas. The industrial people arrive, build factories, and then they become countercolonized by the music, the food, and the psychoactive vegetables. It happened to the British in India.

DB: In a subtle way it changes people’s ways of thinking; it increases the possibilities for what they could think and feel. And they’re not always aware of what’s happening to them.

TL: I see the industrial age as a stage—a very tacky, messy, awkward stage of human evolution. We had to have the smoky factories, and we must mature beyond them. I was very touched by your comments about The Forest. You were trying to acknowledge the romance and the grandeur or the factory civilization even though it was Tucking everything up.

DB: My instinctual reaction is that this stuff sucks. It’s created the mess that we’re in. But you’re never going to find your way out of the mess unless you can somehow, like the samurai, identify with your enemy. Become one with your enemy, understand it, or you won’t be able to find your way out of the maze.  

The Africans who were forcibly brought here have colonized us with their music, with their sensibility and rhythm. They've colonized their oppressors.


TL: The Soviet Union is a great teacher about the horrors of fire power and machine tech. You see the smog and those grizzled old miners coming out of the deep, sooty mines with their faces black. On the other hand, there was a grandeur to it, and you can’t cut out the industrial side of our nature, because it has brought us to this room where we can use machines to record our conversation. That’s something that I find interesting in Japan, which is the perfect machine society. There’s not much pollution there—you never see any filth on the street.

DB: No, it’s cleaned up pretty quickly. You get scolded for tossing a can out your car window. I’ve seen people get scolded for not washing their car! It’s a matter of face.

TL: And nothing is old there. I didn’t see one car that was more than four years old or with a dent in it.

DB: That’s taking LA. one step further.

TL: I spent some time today watching your video Ile Ayie.

DB: It’s about an Afro-Brazilian religion called Candomble. “Ile Ayie” in Yoruba, an African language, roughly translates as the house of life or the realm that we live in.

TL: The biosphere I...

DB: Yeah, the dimension that we live in rather than other existing dimensions. It was done in Bahia, in the city of Salvador, on the coast of northeastern Brazil. It’s about an African religion that’s been there since slavery times. It’s mutated and evolved over the years to the extent that now it could be called an Afro-Brazilian religion—there’s a lot of African elements. The ceremonies, the rituals consist of a lot of drumming, people occasionally go into trance, offerings are made, altars are made... the occasional sacrifice... It’s an ecstatic religion—it feels good.

TL: I’ve never seen so many dignified, happy human beings in any place at any time. For over ninety minutes the screen is filled with these stately older black women...

DB: It’s very joyous and regal. When the drums and dancing kick in, it’s like a really hot rock or rhythm-and-blues show. When the music hits that level where everybody tunes into it, it’s the same kind of feeling.

TL: That’s what religion should be. But it’s not all joyous. At times there’s a sternness—a sphinx-like trance to it.

DB: It deals with acknowledging and paying homage to the natural forces. Some of those are deadly, some are joyous, some are dangerous, and some are life giving. That’s the flux of nature, and Candomble acknowledges the entire dynamic.

TL: You also said that the aim of these ceremonies is to bring the Orixas— deities who serve as intermediaries between mortals and the supreme force of nature. Tell us about that.

DB: When the vibe is right somebody gets possessed by one of the Gods. There’s a pantheon of Gods like in ancient Greece or Rome. The God is said to be there in the room, in the body, so you can have a conversation with him, or dance with him. God isn’t up there unreachable, untouchable. It’s something that can come right down into the room with you. You can dance with God or ask direct questions.

TL: The great thing about the Greek Gods was that they had human qualities.  

But you’re never going to find your way out of the mess unless you can somehow, like the samurai, identify with your enemy. Become one with your enemy, understand it, or you won’t be able to find your way out of the maze.


DB: These as well. They can be sexy, jealous, vain, loving, whatever—all the attributes of people.

TL: William Gibson has written about Voudoun. Many of his Voudoun people talk about the human being as a horse, and how the God comes down and rides the human being.

DB: That’s the Haitian metaphor—the horse. It’s the same idea.

TL: The healer, the warrior, the mother bubbling—one after another these archetypes of characters or natural forces— basic human situations, roles...

DB: The nurturing mother or the warrior man or woman, the sexy coquette...

TL: The seductive female warrior—that’s Yarzan. I became confused when that man dressed as a Catholic priest ranted about false prophets.

DB: The African religion is periodically being persecuted by the Catholic Church, by the Protestant Church, by the government. They go through waves of being recognized and persecuted and going underground and coming back up again and being recognized and pushed down again.

TL: I know the cycle well.

DB: So that was a scene from a fictional film there dramatizing persecution by orthodox religion.

TL: You wrote it in...

DB: It was something I found in a Brazilian film. It was an example of recent persecution; so I threw it in.

TL: That’s a very powerful moment, because it wasn’t orchestrated. It was authentic, as your friend here would say. [Points to a copy of Reproduced Authentic.] Would you comment on this book?

DB: An artist named Joseph Kusuth organized it. He’s most well-known for art that looks like your shirt.

TL: [Displays shirt] It’s designed by Anarchic Adjustments. The front reads “Ecstasy,” and on one arm it reads “Egos In, Egos Out.”

DB: Joseph Kusuth would have a definition of a word and just frame that He invited me to be part of this exhibition in Japan where the idea was to create art with a fax machine. I did something equivalent to the seven deadly sins. It didn’t exist—I collaged it, sandwiched it in the fax machine, and it came out the other end. They took the fax and blew it up to the size of a painting. When it was transmitted, rather than receiving it on paper, they received it on acetate. The acetate became a photo negative. They have fax machines that can receive other materials, and then they can blow it up to any size.

TL: You say you didn’t want to be a scientist because you liked the graffiti in the art department better. If you had been a scientist what would you have been?

DB: At the time I was attracted to pure science—physics—where you could speculate and be creative. It’s equivalent to being an artist. If you get the chance, and the cards fall right, there’s no difference. The intellectual play and spirit are the same.

TL: Nature is that way—it’s basically playful. Murray Gell-Mann, who is one of America’s greatest quantum physicists, used the word “quark” to describe the basic element from a funny line from James Joyce, “three quarks from Muster Mark.”

DB: I had a math teacher in high school who included Lewis Carroll and Alice in Wonderland in his higher math studies. I thought, “This guy knows what he’s doing.”

TL: Dodgson, the fellow who wrote it, knew what he was doing. That metaphor of through the looking glass on the other side of the screen. Talk about your Yoruba Gods and Goddesses. Talk about Yarzan and Shango. Alice is the Goddess of the electronic age.
admin
Site Admin
 
Posts: 36135
Joined: Thu Aug 01, 2013 5:21 am

PreviousNext

Return to Ancien Regime

Who is online

Users browsing this forum: No registered users and 10 guests